JP2020054616A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: In a game machine, a shift is performed to an ST probability variable game state having a high jackpot winning probability and high support frequency of an electric accessory after completion of a probability variable jackpot game when game balls enter a V winning hole of a V winning device in a V winning round game of the probability variable jackpot game, and a shift is performed to a time-shortening game state having a low jackpot winning probability and high support frequency of an electric accessory after completion of a probability variable jackpot game when no game balls enter a V winning hole of a V winning device in a V winning round game. An average variation game of a second special pattern and a normal pattern is shorter in the time-shortening state than in the ST probability variable game state. The average variation game of the second special pattern when a jackpot lottery is lost is shorter and a ready-to-win probability is smaller in the time-shortening game state than in the ST probability variable game state. A difference in a degree of expectation toward a jackpot in an ST game state and a degree of expectation toward a jackpot in the time-shortening game state is small, namely 30% or less.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 12

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

  Some pachinko gaming machines perform a jackpot lottery in one of a low probability mode with a large jackpot probability and a high probability mode with a large jackpot probability. One example of this type of gaming machine is a so-called V-ST machine. In this V-ST machine, a V winning opening is opened in a specific round during a jackpot game, and a game ball is inserted into the V winning opening, whereby the mode is shifted to a high probability mode after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the V-ST machine, if the V winning opening is not opened during the jackpot game, or if the V winning opening is opened but the game ball is not entered, the mode is shifted to the low probability mode after the end of the jackpot game. .

JP 2018-061695 A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to raise the degree of interest and interest in the game to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest and interest in a game and improve the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
After the end of the special game (big hit game), the result of the shift determination by the first game state (low probability mode) or the shift determining means (41) is to shift to the special game state (big hit game). State transition means (41) for transitioning to the second game state (high probability mode) having a transition determination probability (big hit probability) higher than the first game state (low probability mode);
Notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determination means (41);
With
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of special symbols) of the notification game (variable game) is set shorter in the first game state (low probability mode) than in the second game state (low probability mode). It is characterized by being.

FIG. 1 is an exemplary perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exemplary development view illustrating an example of the configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an exemplary development view illustrating an example of the configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The figure which shows an example of the variable prize-winning device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the V winning device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the V winning device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a storage area of a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the performance information display device of a main control apparatus typically. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display example on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device. The figure which shows the example of a display in the game setting value display part of a performance information display device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a special figure start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a first special figure hold command setting processing executed in the special figure start winning processing of FIG. 18. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a main process executed by the main control device. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a general-purpose game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 20. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a general-purpose data setting process executed in the general-purpose game control process of FIG. 21. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a universal figure change start process executed in the universal figure game control process of FIG. 21. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of a per-figure winning game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 20. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 20. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special figure data setting processing executed in the variable game control processing of FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special figure change start processing executed in the change game control processing of FIG. 25. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game control process performed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game control process performed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game control process performed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game control process performed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game control process performed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game control process performed in the main process of FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 20. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 20. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update processing of FIG. 35. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 20. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 20. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 20. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 20. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 41. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 43 is a view showing an example of a reach effect pattern type selection table used when a fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 42. The figure which shows the example of the display screen in the symbol display part from the start of the interval between round games before the start of the V winning round game of the jackpot game until the end of the jackpot game. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device of the gaming machine concerning the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game control process performed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game control process performed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game control process performed in the main process of FIG. The figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen in the symbol display part in the V winning round game of the big hit game.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. Further, the following embodiments are merely examples embodying the present invention and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, rear, left and right and up and down used in the present embodiment are defined by the front and rear direction D1, the vertical direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall. When the outer frame 14 is fixed, it is installed in a game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other gaming machines such as a spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a jing-ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention is applicable to gaming machines.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the inner frame 12. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 8) such as a contact switch for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 according to whether or not a pressing operation is performed. Thus, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated. The operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button effect or the like which is executed when a player performs an operation on the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation period in the variable game effect.

  The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the position in front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the position can be operated by the player. The number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Furthermore, the operation switch 20a is not limited to a contact switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player.

  It is also conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives an operation of the touch key by a player is provided instead of the operation button 20. Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a touch operation of the player on the panel 25 may be provided. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected on the operation button effect and the like.

  The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 32 described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the firing handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 32 is drive-controlled such that one game ball is fired toward the game area, for example, in 0.6 seconds. .

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, and stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130 described below, and arranges the stored game balls in a line. It is used to guide the game ball launching mechanism 32. The lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store excess game balls in the upper plate 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows a player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end of the front frame 11, and perform a sound output effect of outputting sound. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. In addition, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect in a blinking state such as a lighting color, lighting or extinguishing.

[Configuration of Inner Frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, the illustration on the game board 31 is omitted for simplicity of illustration.

  The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a through gate 316, an out opening 317, and a variable winning device 35. , V winning device 36, variable display unit 34, and main display unit 37.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending out the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board of the game board 31. And, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game ball which has not entered the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning device 35 or the V winning device 36 is It is discharged from the out port 317.

  Here, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeder 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The shooting rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 is sent to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. To guide. The ball feeder 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that fires the game ball supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the game board 31. Note that the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires game balls using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the out opening 317 pass through the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, winning sensors 313a and 314a capable of individually detecting the entering of game balls corresponding to the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, and the second winning opening 315, respectively. , 315a (see FIG. 8). In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the out opening 317 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, so that an out ball sensor 317a described later. (See FIG. 8).

  The winning sensors 313a to 315a, the gate passing sensor 316a, and the out ball sensor 317a (see FIG. 8) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of these sensors 313a to 317a are sent to the main control unit 331. Is entered. Then, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the game balls according to the detection results of the winning sensors 313a to 315a. Thereby, the payout control device 7 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in accordance with the types of the winning ports 313 to 315. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, and the number of prize balls when entering the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 is 3. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out-balls based on the detection result of the out-ball sensor 317a. The number of out-balls counted here matches the number of launched game balls hit on the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

  The through gate 316 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a gate passage sensor 316a (see FIG. 8) capable of individually detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 316. The through gate 316 allows a game ball hit in the right area of the game board 31 to pass through. Then, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) executes a lottery drawing per ordinary drawing as to whether or not to open the second winning opening 315 when the passing of the game ball at the through gate 316 is detected.

  The winning sensors 313a to 315a, the gate passage sensor 316a, and the out ball sensor 317a are, for example, proximity sensors of an electromagnetic induction type. However, any sensor that can individually detect the entering of a game ball by another detection method is used. Sensor may be used.

  In addition, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on a game ball entering the second winning opening 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 when the lottery result in the per-figure drawing is per-figure. Then, in the gaming board 31, the opening of the electric accessory 315b enables the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315, and the closing of the electric accessory 315b allows the entry of gaming balls into the second winning opening 315. The sphere is restricted.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is detected by the winning sensor 314a or the winning sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display on the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. The result of the lottery by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the result of the lottery. Then, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed in the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 shifts to a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), and the variable winning device 35 or the V winning device 36 is operated (variable). The winning opening 353, the variable winning opening 363, or the V winning opening 364 is opened.) A jackpot game (special game) in which a round game (unit game) described later is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 4, 5, 16 times) is executed. As a result, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

  When the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the game is shifted to a predetermined big hit game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 4R regular jackpot gaming state, a 5R sure-change jackpot game state, and a 16R sure-change jackpot gaming state.

  The 4R normal jackpot game state is a game state in which the 4R normal jackpot game is executed. The 4R normal jackpot game includes an open / close execution mode in which four normal round games are executed. In the normal round game, the variable prize device 35 is operated to open a variable prize door 352 of the variable prize device 35, which will be described later, and the prize of the game ball 99 to the variable prize port 353 of the variable prize device 35 is allowed. It is a game. In the normal round game, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the variable winning device 35 is activated (the variable winning door 352 is opened), or when the variable winning opening 353 has a maximum number of games (for example, 10) or more. The process ends when the ball 99 wins. Also, in the 4R normal big hit game state, when the 4R normal big hit game ends, the game is shifted to the time saving game state.

  Here, in the time-saving game state, the special figure low probability mode is set for the big hit lottery, and the full figure high probability mode is set for the general figure lottery. That is, in the time-saving game state, the jackpot lottery (special figure lottery) is executed based on the special figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A), and the general figure lottery is executed based on the universal figure high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 12 (E)). In addition, when the lottery per drawing is executed based on the table of whether or not the figure is in the high probability mode, since the lottery result in the drawing per figure is likely to be a per drawing, the electric accessory 315b provided in the second winning opening 315 is provided. Is frequently activated. Such a state where the electric accessory 315b is operated at a high frequency may be referred to as a high frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode is used when a variable game (or a jackpot lottery) of a specified number of times (for example, 90 times) is executed, or when a jackpot lottery is won before the specified number of variable games (or a jackpot lottery) is executed. The process is terminated after the end of the variable game for the jackpot lottery. In addition, when the high frequency support mode is ended by the execution of the variable game or the jackpot lottery of the specified number of times (for example, 90 times), the lottery per ordinary figure is based on the universal figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 12D). The process is shifted to the low frequency support mode in which the lottery result in the per-figure drawing is unlikely to be per-figure. That is, when the high-frequency support mode is ended by executing the variable game or the jackpot lottery for a specified number of times (for example, 90 times), a transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state (the special figure low probability mode and the low frequency support mode) is made. .

  The 5R-probable jackpot game state is a gaming state in which the 5R-probable jackpot game is executed. The 5R-probable jackpot game includes an open / close execution mode in which four normal round games and one V winning round game are executed. In the V prize round game, when the V prize device 36 is operated, a V prize door 362 of the V prize device 36 described later is opened, and the game ball 99 to the variable prize port 363 and the V prize port 364 of the V prize device 36 is opened. Is a game in which winning of the game is allowed. In the V winning round game, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the V winning device 36 is operated (the V winning door 362 is opened), or in the variable winning opening 363 and the V winning opening 364, a total upper limit is set. The process is terminated when a number (for example, 10) or more game balls 99 are won. Also, in the 5R certain jackpot game state, when the 5R certain jackpot game ends, when the game ball 99 is won in the V winning port 364 in the V winning round game, ST (special number of times, for example, 90 times) is set as an upper limit. Time) The game is shifted to the probable change game state, and if the gaming ball 99 is not won in the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game, the game is shifted to the time reduction game state. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a V-ST (gaming) machine which is shifted to the ST-variable gaming state after the jackpot game on condition that the gaming ball 99 is won in the V winning port 364. The V-ST (game) machine may be referred to as a VST (game) machine, a V-variable ST (game) machine, an AR (game) machine, or the like.

  Here, the ST-probable game state is the special figure high probability mode for the jackpot lottery and the general figure high probability mode for the general figure lottery. That is, in the ST-probable changing game state, the jackpot lottery is executed based on the special figure high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10B), and the general figure lottery is executed based on the universal figure high probability mode success / failure table (FIG. 12E). Reference). In other words, the ST certain variation game state is the special figure high probability mode (probable variation mode) and the high frequency support mode. In the special figure high probability mode (probable change mode), like the high-frequency support mode, a specified number of times (for example, 90 times) of a variable game (or after the execution of a jackpot lottery) or a specified number of variable games (or a jackpot lottery) is performed. The process is terminated when a jackpot lottery is won before execution. In addition, when the special figure high probability mode (probable change mode) is terminated by executing the variable game or the jackpot lottery of the specified number of times (for example, 90 times), the jackpot lottery is executed in the special figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A). In the special figure low probability mode executed based on the general figure, the lottery per general figure is executed based on the general figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 12D), and the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. That is, when the special figure high probability mode ends by executing the variable game or the jackpot lottery of the specified number of times (for example, 90 times), the game mode shifts from the ST certain variable game state to the normal game state (the special figure low probability mode and the low frequency support mode). Is done. That is, the ST-probable game state is a finite-probability game state.

  The 16R probability-change jackpot game state is a game state in which the 16R probability-change jackpot game is executed. The 16R probability changing jackpot game includes an opening / closing execution mode in which 15 normal round games and one V winning round game are executed. In this 16R probability changing jackpot game, when the 16R probability changing jackpot game is completed, similarly to the case of the 5R probability changing jackpot game, when the game ball 99 is won in the V winning port 364 in the V winning round game, the state shifts to the ST probability changing game state. When the gaming ball 99 is not won in the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game, the game is shifted to the time saving game state.

  In the 5R probability changing jackpot game and the 16R probability changing jackpot game, a plurality of (for example, two) V winning round games may be set. For example, in the 16R probability changing big hit game, it is conceivable to set the 5R and the 15R or 16R to the V winning round game.

  The variable winning device 35 is operated in the normal round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and when the variable winning door 352 of the variable winning device 35 is opened, the game ball 99 can enter the variable winning opening 353. You. Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variable winning device 35. Specifically, FIG. 5A is a front view of the variable winning device 35 when the variable winning door 352 is at the closed position, and FIG. 5B is a sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 of FIG. It is sectional drawing which follows. FIG. 5C is a front view of the variable winning device 35 when the variable winning door 352 is at the open position, and FIG. 5D is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 of FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 5A to 5D, the variable winning device 35 has a variable winning door 352 that opens and closes an opening 351 that opens forward, a variable winning opening 353, and a variable winning sensor 353a.

  The variable winning door 352 is operated in the normal round game of the jackpot game, and opens and closes the opening 351. The state where the entering of the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 353 is restricted by the opening and closing of the opening 351 by the variable winning opening 352 (see FIGS. 5A and 5B), and the variable winning opening The state in which the game ball 99 can enter the ball 353 (see FIGS. 5C and 5D) is switched. The variable winning door 352 is closed (see FIGS. 5 (A) and 5 (B)) and opened (FIGS. 5 (C) and 5 (D)) by a driving means such as a solenoid. )).

  As shown in FIG. 5C and FIG. 5D, the variable winning opening 353 is used for paying out a prize ball by passing the game ball 99 by opening the opening 351 in the normal round game of the jackpot game. Give an opportunity. In addition, the variable winning opening 353 penetrates the game board 31 in the front-rear direction, and discharges the game balls 99 entering the variable winning device 35 to the back side of the game board 31. The game balls 99 moved to the back side of the game board 31 by the variable winning opening 353 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 like the game balls 99 passing through the general winning opening 313 and the like. (See FIG. 8).

  The variable winning sensor 353a detects the passing (winning) of the game ball 99 in the variable winning opening 353. The variable winning sensor 353a is connected to the main control unit 331 (MPU41) (see FIG. 8), and the main control unit 331 (MPU41) detects when the passing of the game ball 99 is detected by the variable winning sensor 353a. A command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the game balls 99 is transmitted. As a result, the payout control device 7 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls, for example, nine game balls 99.

  The variable winning sensor 353a is, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor, like the winning sensors 313a to 315a. However, the variable winning sensor 353a may be any sensor that can individually detect the entering of the gaming ball 99 by another detection method.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the V winning device 36 is operated in the V winning round game of the open / close execution mode in the probability changing big hit game (5R probability changing big hit game and 16R probability changing big hit game), and the V winning door 362 of the V winning device 36 is opened. Opening allows the game balls 99 to enter the variable winning opening 363 and the V winning opening 364. Here, FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 are diagrams for explaining an example of the V winning device 36. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a front view of the V winning device 36 when the V winning door 362 is at the closed position. FIG. 6B is a front view of the V winning device 36 with the switching member 365 lowered to the right when the V winning door 362 is in the open position, and FIG. 6C is a view of FIG. It is sectional drawing which follows the X3-X3 cutting line, and FIG.6 (D) is sectional drawing which follows the X4-X4 cutting line of FIG.6 (B). 7A is a front view of the V winning device 36 in a state where the switching member 365 is lowered to the left when the V winning door 362 is at the open position, and FIG. 7B is a view of FIG. 7A. It is sectional drawing which follows the X5-X5 cutting line, and FIG.7 (C) is sectional drawing which follows the X6-X6 cutting line of FIG.7 (A).

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the V winning device 36 includes a V winning door 362 that opens and closes an opening 361 that opens forward, a variable winning opening 363, a V winning opening 364, a switching member 365, and a variable winning sensor. 363a and a V winning sensor 364a.

  The V winning door 362 is operated in the V winning round game of the jackpot game, and opens and closes the opening 361. The opening and closing of the opening 361 by the V winning door 362 restricts the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the V winning device 36 (see FIG. 6A) and the allowed state (FIG. 6B). Reference) is switched. The V winning door 362 is rotated between a position at which the opening 361 is closed (see FIG. 6A) and a position at which the opening 361 is opened (see FIG. 6B) by driving means such as a solenoid. The letter “V” indicating that the right side is the V winning opening 364 is attached to the right side of the V winning door 362 (substantially in front of the V winning opening 364). This allows the player to determine which winning opening is the V winning opening 364 that shifts to the ST-variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot game upon winning.

  The variable winning opening 363 and the V winning opening 364 provide an opportunity to pay out a prize ball by passing the game ball 99 by opening the opening portion 361 in the V winning round game of the probable jackpot game. In addition, after the end of the jackpot, the V winning port 364 changes from the jackpot gaming state to a time-saving gaming state (a special figure low probability mode and a normal figure high probability mode (high frequency support mode)) or a normal game state (a special figure low probability mode). Mode and an opportunity to shift to the ST probable variable gaming state (special figure high probability mode and general figure high probability mode (high frequency support mode)) that is more advantageous to the player than the general figure low probability mode (low frequency support mode) I do.

  The variable winning opening 363 penetrates the game board 31 in the front-rear direction on the left side of the opening 361, and discharges the game balls 99 entering the V winning device 36 to the back side of the game board 31. Further, the V winning opening 364 penetrates in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 on the right side of the opening 361, and discharges the game balls 99 entering the V winning device 36 to the back side of the game board 31. The game balls 99 moved to the back side of the game board 31 by the variable winning port 363 and the V winning port 364 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 similarly to the game balls 99 passing through the general winning port 313 and the like. Is detected by the out ball sensor 317a (see FIG. 8).

  The switching member 365 is rotatable in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction in a front view of the game board 31 by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. When the opening 361 is opened in the V winning round game, the switching member 365 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise so that the game balls 99 to the variable winning opening 363 and the V winning opening 364 are rotated. Is switched between a state in which the ball is allowed to enter and a state in which the ball is restricted.

  As shown in FIGS. 6B to 6D, the switching member 365 allows the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 364 when the right end is lower right than the left end. I do. In the downward-sloping state, since the left end of the switching member 365 is located on the front side of the center of the variable winning opening 363, the entering of the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 363 is restricted. Further, in the downward sloping state, the game ball 99 on the switching member 365 is moved rightward toward the V winning opening 364.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A to 7C, the switching member 365 allows the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning opening 363 when the left end is lower left than the right end. I do. In the lower left state, the right end of the switching member 365 is located on the front side of the center of the V winning opening 364, so that the entering of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 is restricted. In the lower left state, the game ball 99 on the switching member 365 is moved to the left toward the variable winning opening 363.

  Further, the switching member 365 is switched to a lower right state or a lower left state by controlling driving means such as a solenoid by the MPU 41. The MPU 41 controls the switching member 365 to a lower right state at the start of the V-winning round game of the probability change jackpot game. As a result, at the start of the V winning round game, entry of the gaming ball 99 into the variable winning opening 363 is restricted, and the game ball 99 is started from a state where the gaming ball 99 easily enters the V winning opening 364. In addition, the MPU 41 switches the switching member 365 to the lower left state when the entering of the game ball 99 into the V winning port 364 is detected before the V winning round game is finished. Thus, in the V winning round game, after the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364, the entering of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 is restricted, and the gaming ball 99 enters the variable winning opening 363. The ball is likely to be hit.

  The variable winning sensor 363a is provided on the back side of the variable winning opening 363, and detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the variable winning opening 363. The V winning variable winning sensor 364a is provided on the back side of the V winning opening 364, and detects that the gaming ball 99 has passed through the V winning opening 364. The variable prize sensor 363a and the V prize variable prize sensor 364a are connected to the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) (see FIG. 8), and the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) includes the variable prize sensor 363a or the V prize variable. When the passing of the game ball 99 is detected by the winning sensor 364a, a command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the game ball 99 is transmitted. As a result, the payout control device 7 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls, for example, nine game balls 99.

  In addition, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) switches the switching member 365 from the lower right state to the lower left state when the V winning variable winning sensor 364a detects that the gaming ball 99 has passed the V winning opening 364. That is, when it is detected that at least one game ball 99 has passed through the V winning opening 364, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) restricts the entering of the gaming ball 99 into the V winning opening 364, while The game ball 99 is allowed to enter the variable winning opening 363. Further, when it is detected by the V winning variable winning sensor 364a that the gaming ball 99 has passed through the V winning opening 364, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) detects that the gaming ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 364. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Upon receiving the V winning command, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the V winning opening 364 to execute a V winning explicit effect indicating that the gaming ball 99 has won, for example. As the V winning prize presentation effect, for example, an image effect in which an image indicating that the gaming ball 99 has won the V prize opening 364 is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 (see FIG. 45B), and the game ball is inserted into the V prize opening 364. An audio output effect in which a notification sound indicating that 99 has won is output from the speaker 26 is conceivable.

  The variable winning sensor 363a and the V winning variable winning sensor 364a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, like the winning sensors 313a to 315a. However, the variable prize sensor 363a and the V prize variable prize sensor 364a may be any sensors that can individually detect the entering of the gaming ball 99 by another detection method.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visually recognized through an opening 31 </ b> A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, a symbol variation display and a variation game corresponding to a lottery result in a jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315. Various displays such as effect displays are performed. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by scrolling a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, numbered “1” to “9”, in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, a sub-design (blank design) that is not configured with a jackpot combination of other characters or designs may be displayed between the decoration designs. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-designs, and there are nine types of decoration designs from "1" to "9".

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game in which the first special symbol display portion 372 or the second special symbol display portion 373 of the main display portion 37 notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the symbol variation display on the symbol display portion 341 is started. After the elapse of a preset variable display time, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all decorative symbols stops. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the decorative symbols fluctuate along a preset variation direction (for example, a horizontal direction, a vertical direction, or the like), and the variation of a plurality of decorative symbols stops in order. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the symbol variation display ends.

  When the symbol change display on the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which decorative symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stop state of the decorative symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot" or "4R normal jackpot", a state in which decorative symbols of the same symbol are arranged in an activated line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that the symbol is a jackpot. Is done. In addition, the jackpot type may be specified by a combination of decorative symbols in the activated line, but is not always specified. More specifically, for example, when the lottery result is “16R probability changing jackpot”, a state in which, for example, a symbol combination of “777” set as a symbol combination indicating the 16R probability changing jackpot among the decorative symbols is arranged in an active line. Or the same symbol combination other than "777" is displayed in a state of being arranged in an effective line. When the lottery result is "5R probability change jackpot", a symbol combination such as "333" set in advance as a symbol combination indicating the 5R probability change jackpot among the decorative symbols is displayed in a state of being arranged in an effective line. Alternatively, the same symbol combination other than the symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot such as “777” or “333” is displayed in a state where they are arranged in an effective line. When the lottery result is “4R normal jackpot”, among the decorative symbols, a symbol combination other than a symbol combination indicating a variable jackpot, such as “222” or “444”, is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot. A state is displayed in which combinations of the same symbols are arranged in an activated line. When the lottery result is “missing”, a state where a combination of different decorative symbols are arranged in an effective line (for example, “323” (out of reach) or “723” (inconsistent)) is displayed.

  In addition, the symbol display section 341 displays a variable game effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, together with the variable display of the decorative symbol in the variable game. When the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, if a jackpot symbol combination other than “777”, which is a combination of decorative symbols indicating the 16R probability change jackpot, is displayed in a state of being arranged in the activated line, the floating game effect As an example, a suggestion effect indicating that it is a 5R certain jackpot or a 4R regular jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, it is other than “333” which is a combination of decorative symbols indicating a probable jackpot (except for “777” which is a combination of decorative symbols indicating that it is a 16R probable jackpot). Is displayed in a state where the jackpot symbol combinations are lined up on the activated line, a suggestion effect indicating that it is a 4R normal jackpot is executed as a variable game effect. In this case, in the big hit game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R certain change big hit is executed. Further, the execution timing of the promotion effect may be executed during the variable game effect. For example, the promotion effect is that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the floating game effect, and then the decorative symbol which is a combination of the decorative symbol “777” or the 5R certain variable jackpot that clearly indicates the 16R probability variable jackpot. May be executed by finally stopping and displaying “333” which is a combination of the above.

  Furthermore, when the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot gaming effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

  The gaming board 31 may be provided with a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, the variable winning device 35 and the V winning device 36. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. Thereby, when an attempt is made to guide the game ball 99 to the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning device 35 or the V winning device 36 using the magnet, the illegal operation is performed. It is possible to detect actions. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided around the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, for example. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. Thus, when an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the winning sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entry of the gaming ball 99 is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

  The main display section 37 includes a normal symbol display section 371, a first special symbol display section 372, a second special symbol display section 373, a first reserved number display section 374, and a second reserved number arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. The display unit 375 is provided.

  The ordinary symbol display unit 371 includes an LED pair as an ordinary symbol (general symbol), and determines whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b that is executed in response to a prize in the through gate 316. The result is displayed by a combination of turning on / off the LED pair. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the LED pair (usually displaying the symbols in a fluctuating manner) in response to the winning of the through gate 316, and turns on or off each LED after the elapse of the fluctuating display time, so that a lottery per drawing is performed. To display the result.

  The first special symbol display unit 372 includes a seven-segment display device as a first special symbol (first special symbol), and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is executed in response to winning in the first winning opening 314. The lottery result in the first special symbol lottery (first special figure lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the seven segments on the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variably displays the first special symbol) upon winning of the first prize port 314, and displays each segment after the lapse of the variable display time. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off.

  The second special symbol display unit 373 includes a seven-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is executed in response to winning in the second winning opening 315. The lottery result in the second special symbol lottery (second special figure lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the seven segments on the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variable display of the second special symbol) upon winning of the second prize port 315, and displays each segment after the lapse of the variable display time. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off.

  The first reserved number display unit 374 includes an LED group including four LEDs, and displays the first special figure reserved number N of the variable display generated by winning the first winning opening 314 by the number of lighted four LEDs. I do.

  The second reserved number display unit 375 includes an LED group composed of four LEDs, and displays the second special figure reserved number M of the variable display generated by winning the second winning opening 315 by the number of lighted four LEDs. I do.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball games supplied from island facilities (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls 99 from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls 99 on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls 99 paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9 (see FIG. 8). The payout control device 7 controls the number of payout balls of the game balls 99 by the payout device 132 and the like. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and a driving unit provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, a system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 8, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of a game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a predetermined jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

  The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. The input / output I / F 42 is connected to winning sensors 313a to 315a, a gate passing sensor 316a, variable winning sensors 353a and 363a, a V winning sensor 364a, an out ball sensor 317a, and the like. Then, based on the detection signals from the winning sensors 313a to 315a, the MPU 41 plays the game balls 99 to the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 353, 363, and the V winning opening 364. It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has entered or whether the game ball 99 has passed through the through gate 316. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out-balls (the number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out-ball sensor 317a. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to a sound lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, a power control device 9, and the like.

  Then, the MPU 41 gives the voice lamp control device 5 a special figure changing pattern command, a first special figure holding command, a second special figure holding command, a special figure shift command, a big hit game start command, a round game start command, a V winning round. Commands such as a pre-game interval start command, a V winning command, an ending start command, and a jackpot game end command are output.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation display time of a first special symbol (also referred to as “first special figure”) or a second special symbol (also referred to as “second special figure”) for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, And a command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The special figure fluctuation pattern command is based on information stored in a special figure reservation storage area 412b (described later) when the fluctuation display of the special symbol (the first special figure or the second special figure) on the main display unit 37 is started. This is set in step S2012 in the special figure change start process in FIG. 27 described later. Note that the special figure variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time of the special symbol. In this case, the command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the lottery result and the type of the big hit in the big hit lottery is set as a command different from the special figure variation pattern command.

  The first special figure hold command and the second special figure hold command increase when the first special figure hold number N or the second special figure hold number M stored in the later-described special figure hold storage area 412b increases. This is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result, the special figure variation pattern, and the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M in the jackpot lottery with respect to the reservation. The first special figure hold command and the second special figure hold command are stored in a later-described special figure hold storage area 412b when the first special figure hold number N or the second special figure hold number M increases. This is set based on the information (step S1207 or step S1209 of the first special figure pending command setting process in FIG. 19 described later).

  The special figure shift command is used when the first special figure reserved number N or the second special figure reserved number M decreases, the first special figure first reserved area REA1 to the first special figure fourth reserved area REA4 or the second special figure reserved area REA4. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the winning / losing information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REB1 to the second special figure fourth reservation area REB4 has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1908 in the special figure data setting process in FIG.

  The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, that is, the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state, and is a command in the jackpot game control process of FIG. This is set in step S2105. In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the audio ramp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, the jackpot game is started by the audio ramp control device 5 receiving the jackpot game start command. Not only that, but also that the opening will start. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice lamp control device 5 may recognize that the opening is started by the opening start command.

  The round game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that each round game is started and the number of rounds indicating the number of the round in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. Yes, it is set in step S2116 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later. In addition, in the sound ramp control device 5, it can be understood that the opening is ended by the round game start command and the opening / closing execution mode is started, but the opening end command is set at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command, Alternatively, an opening / closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening / closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.

  The V prize round pre-game interval start command is a command for notifying the sound ramp control device 5 that a round inter-game interval immediately before the V prize round game in the probability change jackpot game is started is started. It is set in step S2135 in the 30 big hit game control processing. When the voice lamp control device 5 receives the V winning round pre-game interval start command, for example, the variable winning that prompts the player to win the game ball 99 in the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 in the symbol display unit 341. A request effect is executed (see FIG. 45A).

  The V winning command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the gaming ball 99 has been thrown into the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 in the V winning round game in the probability changing jackpot game, as will be described later. It is set in step S2150 in the 32 big hit game control process. When the voice lamp control device 5 receives the V winning command, for example, the symbol display unit 341 performs a V winning explicit effect that clearly indicates to the player that the gaming ball 99 has been won in the V winning opening 364 (FIG. 45). (B)).

  The big hit game end command is a command for notifying the audio ramp control device 5 that the big hit game is finished, and is set in step S2173 in the big hit game control process of FIG. 33 described later.

  Note that commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description of those commands will be omitted.

  The main controller 4 also includes an oscillation circuit and a frequency dividing circuit as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, an execution cycle of a main timer interrupt process described later executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider.

  In the present embodiment, the clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 executes the main timer reset described below every time the rising (or falling) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the loading process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock mainly controlled by the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 or the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412, the counter information stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b and the general figure holding storage area 412c, and performs a jackpot lottery (lot drawing per special figure) and a special symbol. The variable display time, lottery setting per ordinary drawing, and the like are executed.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in a jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used in determining a jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used in determining a missed type. included. The lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variable display time of a special symbol (decorative symbol on the symbol display portion 341) on the main display portion 37. And a variation type counter CS1 to be determined. Further, the lottery counter 412a has a random number counter C4 for general drawing and a random number counter for general figure used for lottery per general drawing to determine whether or not the electric accessory 315b provided in the second winning opening 315 is to be opened. A general-purpose initial value counter CIN2 used for setting the initial value of C4 is included. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 at the time of setting a jackpot lottery (a special figure lottery), a special symbol change display time, and a general figure lottery. You.

  The special figure reservation storage area 412b includes a first special figure reservation storage area REA, a second special figure reservation storage area REB, and a special figure execution area RAE. The first special figure reserved storage area REA includes a first special figure first reserved area REA1, a first special figure second reserved area REA2, a first special figure third reserved area REA3, a first special figure fourth reserved area REA4, And the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery (lot per special figure) is performed based on each value stored in the first special figure holding storage area REA, and a first special symbol (first special figure) is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 372. Is sometimes referred to as a first special symbol game. The second special figure reserved storage area REB includes a second special figure first reserved area REB1, a second special figure second reserved area REB2, a second special figure third reserved area REB3, a second special figure fourth reserved area REB4, And the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on the respective values stored in the second special symbol holding storage area REB, and the second special symbol (second special symbol) is changed and stopped on the second special symbol display portion 373. The type of variable game played may be referred to as a second special symbol game.

  When the gaming ball 99 enters the first winning port 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is displayed. The information is acquired as the hit information used in the jackpot lottery and stored in any one of the first special figure first holding area REA1 to the first special figure fourth holding area REA4 of the first special figure holding storage area REA. When the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is displayed. The information is acquired as the hit information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in any of the second special figure first holding area REB1 to the second special figure fourth holding area REB4 of the second special figure holding storage area REB. The acquisition process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the shift determination unit of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. The lottery counter 412a (the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1) correspond to each of the first special figure reservation storage area REA and the second special figure reservation storage area REB. Etc.) may be provided separately.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the change type counter CS1 is provided in the first special figure first storage area of the first special figure storage area REA. REA1 to first special figure fourth holding area REA4 and second special figure first holding area REB1 to second special figure fourth holding area REB4 of second special figure holding storage area REB.

  Therefore, the first special figure first storing area REA1 of the first special figure storing area REA1 and the second special figure first storing area REB1 of the first special figure storing area REA4. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game executed based on the win / fail information stored in the second special figure fourth holding area REB4, a normal symbol on the normal symbol display section 371 (a symbol on the symbol display section 341) It is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the variation display of the decorative design.

  Specifically, when the game ball 99 enters the first winning opening 314, the winning / failing information includes the first special figure first holding area REA1, the first special figure second holding area REA2, and the first special figure third holding. The area REA3 and the first special figure fourth reserved area REA4 are stored in the empty areas in the priority order. In the first special figure reserved number storage area NAA, the number of hit / fail information among the first special figure first reserved area REA1 to the first special figure fourth reserved area REA4 is set as the first special figure reserved number N. Is stored.

  When the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315, the winning / failing information includes the second special figure first holding area REB1, the second special figure second holding area REB2, and the second special figure third holding area REB3. , And are stored in areas free of priority in the second special figure fourth holding area REB4. In the second special figure reserved number storage area NAB, the number of the hit / fail information stored in the second special figure first reserved area REB1 to the second special figure fourth reserved area REB4 is set as the second special figure reserved number M. Is stored.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the maximum holding of the first special figure first holding area REA1 to the first special figure fourth holding area REA4, and the second special figure first holding area REB1 to the second special figure fourth holding area REB4. With a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the numbers, it is possible to hold up to four pieces of winning / failing information as winning histories to the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, respectively.

  It is to be noted that another embodiment in which the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315 are provided with a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 in common is also considered as another embodiment. It is possible to suspend winning / losing information as a winning history. The storage process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

  The special figure execution area RAE is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol in the symbol display part 341) in the first special symbol display part 372 or the second special symbol display part 373 of the main display part 37 is started. A storage used for moving the winning / failing information stored in the first special figure first storage area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA or the second special figure first storage area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. Area. More specifically, the hit / fail information of the second special figure first holding area REB1 of the second special figure holding storage area REB is preferentially moved to the special figure execution area RAE, and the hit / fail information of the second special figure first holding area REB1. When the information does not exist and the second special figure reserved number M stored in the second special figure reserved number storage area NAB is 0, the first special figure first reserved area of the first special figure reserved storage area REA. The REA1 pass / fail information is moved to the special figure execution area RAE.

  The difference between the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA and the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB is 2 In the case described above, another embodiment may be considered in which the value of the holding area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the special figure execution area RAE. Further, another embodiment may be considered in which the success / failure information of the first special figure first reservation area REA1 and the second special figure first reservation area REB1 is alternately moved to the special figure execution area RAE.

  Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like based on numerical information stored in the special figure execution area RAE as win / fail information. At this time, when the first special figure first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA is moved to the special figure execution area RAE, the validity information stored in the first special figure second reservation area REA2. Shifts to the first special figure first reservation area REA1, the validity information stored in the first special figure third reservation area REA3 shifts to the first special figure second reservation area REA2, and the first special figure fourth reservation The validity information stored in the area REA4 is shifted to the first special figure third reserved area REA3.

  Similarly, when the second special figure first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB is moved to the special figure execution area RAE, the hit / wrong information stored in the second special figure second storage area REB2 is The second special figure shifts to the first reservation area REB1 and the validity information stored in the second special figure third reservation area REB3 shifts to the second special figure second reservation area REB2 and the second special figure fourth reservation area. The rejection information stored in REB4 is shifted to the second special figure third reservation area REB3.

  The general figure holding storage area 412c includes a general figure first holding area NE1, a general figure second holding area NE2, a general figure third holding area NE3, a general figure fourth holding area NE4, a general figure holding number storage area NAC, and Includes general map execution area NAE. Hereinafter, a lottery is performed for each ordinary figure based on the values stored in the ordinary figure first reserved area NE1 to the ordinary figure fourth reserved area NE4, and the ordinary symbol (regular figure) is changed and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 371. The stop display may be referred to as a normal game or a normal game. When the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 316, the value of the per-figure-per-random number counter C4 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as winning / fail information used in the per-figure per-lottery, and the peri-figure first holding area NE1 to NE4 are stored in one of the fourth holding areas NE4.

  The general figure execution area NAE is used for moving the winning / failing information stored in the general figure first reservation area NE1 when the variable display of the general symbol is started on the normal symbol display section 371 of the main display section 37. This is a storage area.

  Then, at the start of one general-purpose game, the MPU 41 performs lottery per general-purpose drawing based on numerical information stored as hit / fail information in the general-purpose execution area NAE. At this time, if the first figure holding area NE1 is moved to the general figure execution area NAE, the pass / fail information stored in the second figure holding area NE2 is shifted to the first figure first holding area NE1. The hit / fail information stored in the third holding area NE3 in FIG. 3 is shifted to the second holding area NE2 in FIG. 4 and the hit / fail information stored in the fourth holding area NE4 in general is shifted to the third holding area NE3 in FIG.

  Here, the jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 65535, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball 99 wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is defined by a winning / failing table stored in a winning / failing table storage area in the ROM 411. The winning / failing table is a special figure low probability mode success / failure table referred to in the special figure low probability mode (normal game state and time saving game state), and a special figure high probability referenced in the special figure high probability mode (ST-probable game state). Includes a mode success / failure table. Here, FIG. 10A shows an example of a special figure low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the special figure low probability mode, and FIG. 10B shows an example of a special figure high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the special figure high probability mode. FIG. The special figure low probability mode success / failure table and the special figure high probability mode success / failure table are stored in the success / failure table storage area of the ROM 411.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (A), the special figure low probability mode success / failure table is provided with a plurality of success / failure tables in which the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery becomes a big hit (big hit probability) differs according to the game setting value. I have. Specifically, the special figure low probability mode success / failure table includes six success / failure tables corresponding to game setting values 1 to 6 in six stages. The jackpot probability is higher in the order of the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2, and the game setting value 1, which are advantageous to the player in this order.

  In the special figure low probability mode success / failure table of the game setting value 1, among the 65536 jackpot random number counters C0 of 0 to 65535 (random number values), the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 662 (0 to 661). That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability mode is about 1/99 (662/65536).

  In the special figure low probability mode success / failure table of the game setting value 2, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 669 (0 to 668). is there. That is, with the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability mode is about 1/98 (669/65536).

  In the special figure low probability mode success / failure table of the game setting value 3, out of the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 676 (0 to 675). is there. That is, with the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability mode is about 1/97 (676/65536).

  In the special figure low probability mode success / failure table of the game setting value 4, out of the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 683 (0 to 682). is there. That is, with the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability mode is about 1/96 (683/65536).

  In the special figure low probability mode success / failure table of the game setting value 5, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 690 (0 to 689). is there. That is, with the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability mode is about 1/95 (690/65536).

  In the special figure low probability mode success / failure table of the game setting value 6, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 697 in the low probability mode success / failure table. (0-696). That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability mode is about 1/94 (697/65536).

  In the special figure low probability mode success / failure table, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be out of order.

  In addition, six special figure low probability mode success / failure tables are provided in accordance with the game setting values of the six stages, but at least one special figure low probability mode success / failure table is sufficient. That is, the game setting value is not limited to six levels.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, in the special figure high probability mode success / failure table, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535 in any of the game setting values 1 to 6 is the big hit. Is 720 (0 to 719). That is, in the special figure high probability mode success / failure table, the jackpot probability is about 1/90 (720/65536) of the same probability shared by all game setting values.

  In the special figure high probability mode success / failure table, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be out of order.

  In addition, the special figure high probability mode success / failure table may include a plurality of success / failure tables having different jackpot probabilities corresponding to game setting values, similarly to the special figure low probability mode success / failure table.

  In addition, the jackpot random number value in the special figure low probability mode hit / fail table is common to the jackpot random number value in the high probability mode hit / fail table, but the jackpot random number value may be at least partially different in these hit / fail table. In addition, in each of the special figure low probability mode success / failure table and the special figure high probability mode success / failure table, the jackpot winning random number value may be a partly or entirely discrete value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 99, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball 99 wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the jackpot type is defined by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of a big hit type distribution table when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. The distribution table is stored in a distribution table storage area in the ROM 411.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10C, when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning in the first winning opening 314, the number of random numbers that are 4R normal jackpots is 40 of 0 to 39. The number of random numbers to be a 5R probability variable jackpot is 59 from 40 to 98, and the number of random numbers to be a 16R probability variable jackpot is one of 99. That is, in the first special symbol game, the probability of big hit is 60% (5R probability of big hit is 59%, 16R probability of big hit is 1%), and the normal jackpot probability is 40%. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by a prize in the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers which are 5R probability variable jackpots is 95 from 0 to 94, and 16R probability variable jackpots. The number of such random numbers is five from 95 to 99. That is, in the second special symbol game, there is usually no distribution of the jackpot, and the jackpot is a 100% probability variable jackpot. Of course, in the second special symbol game, a normal jackpot distribution may be provided. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability change big hit in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the ST-probable game state (special figure high probability mode and high frequency support mode), the time saving game state (special figure low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal game state (special figure low probability mode and low frequency support mode) ), The expected value of the game balls 99 obtained when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is set higher.

  In the present embodiment, separate winnings are provided for each of the first winning opening 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning and the second winning opening 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. A minute table is set, and depending on which of the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 the gaming ball 99 has won, the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same as that of the symbol game.

  Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area RAE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “4R normal jackpot”, “5R certain variable jackpot”, “ 16R probable jackpot ”or“ missing ”.

  Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability changing jackpot, a 5R probability changing jackpot game including an opening / closing execution mode in which five round games (unit games) are repeated is executed. The five round games include four regular round games in which the variable winning opening 353 of the variable winning device 35 is opened, and one V in which the variable winning opening 363 and the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 are opened. Includes winning round games. In the 5R probability change jackpot game, one V winning round game is executed as the final round game, that is, the 5R round game.

  In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability change jackpot, a 16R probability change jackpot game including an open / close execution mode in which 16 round games (unit games) are repeated is executed. The 16 round games include 15 normal round games and one V winning round game. In the 16R probability changing jackpot game, one V winning round game is executed as the final round game, that is, the 16R round game.

  As described above, in the probability changing jackpot game (5R probability changing jackpot and 16R probability changing jackpot game), the V winning prize round game is executed as the final round game. Here, in the V winning round game, as described above, the gaming ball 99 can be won in the V winning opening 364, and when the gaming ball 99 is thrown in the V winning opening 364, the certain variable jackpot game is performed. After the end of the game, the game shifts to the special figure high probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is high and the high-frequency support mode in which the opening probability (lottery probability per ordinary drawing) of the electric accessory 315b is high, that is, the ST sure change game state. In the present embodiment, the ST-probable changing game state is such that the MPU 41 executes a specified number (in this embodiment, 90) of jackpot lottery (variable game) or a specified number of jackpot lottery (variable game). By the time, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is continued until the player is notified that the lottery result is a jackpot. That is, in the ST-probable game state, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed until the specified number of jackpots (variable game) are executed. Then, when the lottery result of the specified number of jackpots is notified to the player in the ST-probable gaming state, the low-frequency support in which the opening probability (lottery probability per ordinary drawing) of the electric accessory 315b is low from the high-frequency support mode. Mode. That is, in the ST game state (special figure high probability mode and high frequency support mode), when the notification of the specified number of lottery results is completed without the jackpot lottery result becoming a big hit, the normal game state (special figure low probability mode and high frequency support mode). (Low frequency support mode). As described above, the ST-probable variable game state is a finite-probability variable game state in which the special figure high probability mode is continued in a special period (special time: ST) until the specified number of variable games is executed.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 4R normal jackpot, a 4R normal jackpot game including an open / close execution mode in which four round games (unit games) are repeated is executed. The four round games include four normal round games, and the V winning prize round game that triggers the shift to the ST-variable game state is not executed. Therefore, in the case of the 4R normal jackpot, the game is not shifted to the ST-probable changing game state after the 4R jackpot game ends, and the special probability low probability mode in which the jackpot winning probability is low and the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b (normal The game is shifted to the time-saving game state in which the high frequency support mode has a high drawing probability per figure. In the present embodiment, the time-saving game state is the same as the ST-probable game state, until the MPU 41 executes a specified number (in this embodiment, 90) of jackpots (variable game) or the specified number of jackpots. Until the lottery (variable game) is performed, the process is continued until the result of the lottery in the jackpot lottery is notified to the player. That is, in the time-saving game state, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed until the specified number of jackpots (variable game) are executed, as in the ST-probable game state. When the notification of the lottery result of the specified number of times ends without the jackpot lottery result becoming the big hit, the game is shifted from the time saving game state to the normal game state (the special figure low probability mode and the low frequency support mode).

  By the way, in the case of the 4R normal jackpot game, four normal round games are executed. In the 4R normal jackpot game, the jackpot game ends when four normal round games are executed. On the other hand, in the case of the 5R probability-change jackpot game, a V winning round game is executed after four normal round games have been executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the 5R V-prize round game is executed after the 4 normal round games have been executed, and determines whether the game is a 4R normal jackpot or a 5R certain variable jackpot game. You can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention. Thereby, the interest of the game is improved.

  Here, FIG. 10D is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot expectation degree in the high-frequency support mode (ST-probable game state and time-saving game state).

  As shown in FIG. 10 (D), in the ST-probable game state, a jackpot lottery is performed based on the special figure high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10 (B)), and the high frequency support mode has a maximum of 90 times. The jackpot lottery (variable game) is continued until it is executed. The jackpot probability in the special figure high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10B) is common to all game setting values 1 to 6, and is about 1/90. Therefore, in the ST game state, the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit by the end of the 90 big hit lotteries (big hit expectation degree in the ST-variable game state) is 63.43%.

  In the time-saving gaming state, a jackpot lottery is performed based on the special figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A), and the high frequency support mode is executed up to 90 times in the jackpot lottery (variable game). To be continued. The big hit probability in the special figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A) differs for each of the game setting values 1 to 6. Since the jackpot probability is about 1/99 at the game setting value 1, the probability that the lottery result will be a jackpot by the end of the 90 jackpot lotteries (the jackpot expectation degree in the time-saving game state) is 59.90%. . In addition, the jackpot expectation degree in the time reduction game state with the game setting value 2 is 60.24%, the jackpot expectation degree in the time reduction game state with the game setting value 60 is 60.69%, and the time reduction game with the game setting value 4 The jackpot expectation degree in the state is 61.03%, the jackpot expectation degree in the game setting value 5 in the time saving game state is 61.42%, and the jackpot expectation degree in the game setting value 6 in the time saving game state is 61.81. %.

  As described above, the jackpot expectation degree in the time-saving game state differs for each game setting value, and the range is 59.90% to 61.81%. In other words, the jackpot expectation degree in the time saving game state is lower than the jackpot expectation degree (63.43%) in the ST probability change game state, and the ST probability change game state is more advantageous than the time reduction game state for the jackpot expectation degree. . On the other hand, the difference between the jackpot expectation degree in the ST-probable gaming state and the jackpot expectation degree in the time-saving gaming state is 3.53% at maximum (game setting value 1), and the difference between these jackpot expectation degrees is small. As described above, since the difference between the jackpot expectation degree in the ST probability changing game state and the jackpot expectation degree in the time saving game state is small, the player can enter the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game of the probability change jackpot game as described later. Even when a puncture is intentionally generated without entering the game ball 99, the disadvantage to the player is reduced. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, since the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special map is the same as the ST probable game state and the time saving game state, the game ball 99 is inserted into the second winning opening 315 using the high frequency support. As long as the ball is hit and a jackpot lottery is performed, the difference between the ST probability variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is small for the expected degree and the payout value that will be the probability variable jackpot. This can also reduce the disadvantage that the player receives when intentionally generating a puncture in the V winning round game.

  The difference between the jackpot expectation degree in the ST-probable game state and the jackpot expectation degree in the time-short game state is 3.53% at the maximum in the present embodiment. The difference from the jackpot expectation in the gaming state is set, for example, within 30%, preferably set to 25% or less, and more preferably set to 15% or less. Since the upper limit value of the difference between the jackpot expectation degree in the ST-probable gaming state and the jackpot expectation degree in the time-saving gaming state is in the above range, the player intentionally generates a puncture in the V winning round game. The disadvantages experienced in such cases can be effectively reduced. The difference between the jackpot expectation degree in the ST-probable gaming state and the jackpot expectation degree in the time-saving gaming state is set to, for example, 1% or more, and preferably 5% or more. Since the upper limit of the difference between the jackpot expectation degree in the ST-probable gaming state and the jackpot expectation degree in the time-saving gaming state is in the above range, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game is lower than that in the ST-probable gaming state. Even when shifting to the time-saving gaming state, the disadvantage in the second gaming state based on the shift determination probability is more reliably reduced.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 changes the variation pattern type (variable display time) of the variation display of the normal symbol (decorative symbol on the symbol display portion 341) on the ordinary symbol display portion 371 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. ). By determining the type of the variation pattern in this way, the main controller 4 controls the variation display of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 371. Further, in the sound lamp control device 5, the rough fluctuating game production types such as high-speed fluctuating production (basic production, non-reach production), normal reach production, super reach production, and special reach production are changed to the fluctuation pattern type (variation display time). Determined accordingly. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process described later is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 20). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball 99 wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of the variation pattern while referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, or the outlier variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these change tables may be provided separately for each special figure low probability mode and special figure high probability mode. In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 11 (A) and FIG. 11 (B) are diagrams showing examples of the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, respectively. In addition, each big hit variation table is stored in the big hit variation table storage area in the ROM 411.

  As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, a variation pattern is associated in advance in accordance with the value of the variation type counter CS1. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “4R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 uses the normal jackpot fluctuation table. By referring to each of them, the type of the variation pattern is specified.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, a variation pattern is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern in which the variable display time is 30 s as the variation type (effect pattern type). Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual variable game effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach effect. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern in which the variable display time is 60 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the super reach effect in the symbol display unit 341. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual variable game effect type in the variable game effect is a super reach effect. Further, when the fluctuation pattern “03” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a special reach effect pattern in which the fluctuation display time is the longest, that is, 90 s, as the fluctuation type (effect pattern). The effect pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual variable game effect type in the variable game effect is a special reach effect.

  The reach random number counter C3 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 249, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball 99 wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. In the gaming machine 10, a separate type table is provided for each of the normal gaming state, the ST-variable gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state. Here, FIGS. 11 (C), 11 (D), and 11 (E) show examples of the normal game state out-of-class type table, the ST sure change game state out-of-class type table, and the time saving game state out-of-class type table, respectively. It is. Each of the miss type tables is stored in a miss type table storage area in the ROM 411.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 (C) to 11 (E), in the normal game state, the ST-variable game state out-of-class type table, and the time-short game state out-of-class type table, the final stop symbol before and after the reach occurs after the reach occurs. For each of the following three types of disengagement: reach before and after the stop which is shifted by only one, reach after the reach occurs and the final stop symbol stops before and after the reach symbol, and reach completely after the reach does not occur. The value of the corresponding reach random number counter C3 is set.

  Here, “reach” is a state in which the symbol design is likely to be a symbol combination of a decorative symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won from the time when the decorative symbol variable display is started on the symbol display portion 341 until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Is a fluctuation state indicated by. In one example, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the payline in the symbol display unit 341, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the remaining one of the stop positions fluctuates. In other words, in a state in which two of the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, it is difficult to determine whether or not a big hit or an out of place, and the final stop which is finally stopped and displayed. This is a variation mode in which it is possible to determine whether a big hit or a miss is made by stopping and displaying the symbol. Also, while the reach is fluctuating in the symbol display unit 341, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest a degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation buttons 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. A user participation type operation effect process is executed. During the execution of the effect processing, the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. On the other hand, complete removal means that the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the removed symbols without reaching the decoration symbol. In other words, this is a variation mode in which it is possible to determine that two decorative symbols out of the three decorative symbols have come off in a state of being stopped and displayed.

  More specifically, the normal game state deviation variation type table shown in FIG. 11C is referred to in the normal game state in which the special figure low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 0 to 9 , The reach is 10-39, the reach is 10-39, and the reach is 40-249.

  The ST-probable-variation-game-out-of-change type table shown in FIG. 11D is referred to in the ST-probable-variable-game state in which the special figure high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are used. In some cases, the reach is out of front and rear, when it is 10 to 29, it is reach other than out of front and rear, and when it is 30 to 249, it is completely out of reach.

  In addition, the time-short game state deviation variation type table shown in FIG. 11E is referred to in the time-short game state in which the special figure low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are used, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 0 to 4. , The reach is 5 to 9, the reach is other than the front and rear, and if the reach is 10 to 249, the reach is complete.

  In addition, when starting the variable game corresponding to the 5R certain jackpot, the 16R variable jackpot or the 4R regular jackpot, the MPU 41 determines that the reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  As shown in FIGS. 11C to 11E, when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the value of the reach random number counter C <b> 3 in which the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 becomes the reach. The numbers are set in the order of the normal game state (0 to 39), the ST probable game state (0 to 29), and the time saving game state (0 to 9). , The reach is likely to occur (the probability of reach is high), and the probability of complete disconnection is low. Here, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol (decorative symbol) in the variable game is longer in the reach out of front and back and the reach other than the back and forth (out of reach) than in the complete out of play (see FIGS. 12A to 12C). ). Therefore, the higher the reach probability is, the longer the average fluctuation display time of the fluctuation game tends to be. Therefore, by setting the reach occurrence probability in the time-saving game state to be lower than that in the ST-probable game state, the time until the specified number of times (90 times) of the variable game in the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) is consumed. Can be made shorter than the time required to complete the specified number of (90) variable games in the ST-variable game state (high-frequency support mode).

  Here, FIGS. 12 (A), 12 (B), and 12 (C) show examples of the normal game state deviation fluctuation table, the ST probability variation game state deviation fluctuation table, and the time saving game state deviation fluctuation table, respectively. It is. Note that each outlier fluctuation table is stored in a fluctuation table storage area in the ROM 411.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (C), in the normal game state deviation fluctuation table, the ST sure variation game state deviation fluctuation table, and the time saving game state deviation fluctuation table, when the deviation type is reach (rearrangement before and after). A variation pattern is separately defined by the variation type counter CS1 separately for reach, reach other than the reach before and after reach and complete reach.

  Specifically, in the normal game state deviation fluctuation table shown in FIG. 12A, when the deviation type is reach, when the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 99, the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display time is 30 seconds is “ 01 "is selected, the variation pattern" 02 "having a variable display time of 60 s is selected when it is 100 to 174, and the variation pattern" 03 "having a variable display time of 90 s is selected when it is 175 to 199. Is done. On the other hand, in the normal game state deviation fluctuation table, when the deviation type is completely deviated, when the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 99, the fluctuation pattern “04” whose fluctuation display time is 7 s is selected, and 100 to 199. In this case, the fluctuation pattern “05” whose fluctuation display time is 10 s is selected. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not in the normal gaming state, the average fluctuation display time of the fluctuation game is 14.94 seconds.

  In addition, in the ST probability change game state deviation change table shown in FIG. 12B, when the deviation type is reach, when the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 74, the fluctuation pattern “06” in which the fluctuation display time is 20 s. Is selected, the variation pattern “07” having a variable display time of 40 s is selected when the variation display time is 75 to 124, and the variation pattern “02” having a variable display time of 60 s is selected when the variation display time is 125 to 199. . On the other hand, in the ST probability changing game state deviation fluctuation table, when the deviation type is completely deviated, when the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 49, the fluctuation pattern “08” whose fluctuation display time is 4 s is selected, and When it is 149, the fluctuation pattern “04” having the variable display time of 7 s is selected, and when it is 150 to 199, the fluctuation pattern “05” having the variable display time of 10 s is selected. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order in the ST-probable game state, the average fluctuation display time of the fluctuation game is 10.96 seconds.

  In the time-short game state deviation fluctuation table shown in FIG. 12C, when the deviation type is reach, when the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 99, the fluctuation pattern “09” in which the fluctuation display time is 15 s is obtained. When the selected variable is 100 to 174, the variable pattern "10" having a variable display time of 25 s is selected, and when the variable display time is 175 to 199, the variable pattern "11" having a variable display time of 35 s is selected. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state variation table, when the type of deviation is complete deviation, when the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 199, the variation pattern “12” whose variation display time is 2 s is selected. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of place in the time-saving game state, the average fluctuation display time of the fluctuation game is 2.77 seconds, which is significantly shorter than the ST-probable fluctuation game state.

  In addition, the variation pattern of the out-of-reach (other than out-of-reach reach and out-of-reach reach) is selected from any of 20 seconds, 40 seconds, and 60 seconds in the ST-probable game state, and 15 seconds, 25 seconds, and Selected from any of 35 seconds. That is, the average fluctuation display time of the fluctuation game at the time of losing the reach is shorter in the time-saving game state than in the ST-probable fluctuation game state. In addition, the variation pattern of the complete departure is selected from 4 seconds, 7 seconds, and 10 seconds in the ST certain variation game state, and is fixed to 2 seconds in the time reduction game state. In other words, the average fluctuation display time of the variable game at the time of complete departure is shorter in the time reduction game state than in the ST certain variable game state. In this way, by setting the average fluctuation display time of the fluctuation game in the time reduction game state at the time of the reach departure or the complete deviation, to be lower than the ST sure change game state, in the time reduction game state (high frequency support mode). The time required to complete the specified number of times (90 times) of the variable game may be shorter than the time required to complete the specified number of times (90 times) of the variable game in the ST-variable game state (high-frequency support mode). Will be possible. Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is off (when the fluctuating game effect of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 is a off-reach effect or a completely off-effect effect), the average fluctuation display time of the fluctuating game is ST. In the time saving game state, for example, it is set to 75% or less, preferably 50% or less, more preferably 40% or less, and still more preferably 30% or less with respect to the probable change game state. As described above, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, the average game time of the variable game in the time-saving game state (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is changed to the average game time of the variable game in the ST certain variable game state. On the other hand, by being in the above range, a significant difference can be provided between the average game time in the time-saving game state and the average game time in the ST-variable game state. When the time-saving game state or the ST-probable game state is ended by executing the upper limit jackpot lottery or the variable game, the time required for the time-saving game state to be completed is determined by the time the ST-probable game state ends. A clear difference can be provided for the time required. Therefore, when the player wants to give priority to the shorter average fluctuation display time of the variable game over the high probability of the jackpot, for example, when there is a restriction on the game time of the player, the request is set. Can be reliably satisfied. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of place (when the fluctuating game effect of the decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341 is out-of-reach or completely out-of-reach effect), the average fluctuation display time of the fluctuating game is ST In the time-saving game state, for example, it is set to 1% or more, preferably 5% or more, in the game state. As described above, the average game time of the variable game in the time-saving game state is in the above range with respect to the average game time of the variable game in the ST-probable game state, so that the average game time in the time-saving game state is extremely short. It is prevented that it becomes too much. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the time-saving gaming state due to the repetition of the variable game in the time-saving gaming state in a short time is prevented.

  In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, the variable display time when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of comparison with the ST-probable gaming state is either in the out-of-reach or completely out-of-reach situations, and when the lottery result is out. As a whole, the probability of becoming shorter tends to be rather high, and tends to become shorter.

  By the way, the ST-probable game state may continue until the game hall is closed, and the player may be forced to leave the game hall in the ST-probable game state. In addition, the player may have a limited game time due to requirements or the like, and the ST-probable game state may continue at his / her scheduled exit time. In other words, in a situation where there is a time constraint until the game hall closes or the player's own scheduled exit time, a situation may occur in which the player is forced to exit the shop in the ST-variable game state. When such a situation is expected to occur, if a sufficient game time can be secured, more balls may be obtained, and thus there is a tendency that the end of the game in the ST-variable game state is not desired. Further, the player desires to execute the variable game as many times as possible in a short time as much as possible within the range of the remaining game time, and eventually to execute the big hit game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, the V winning round game is executed in the probable jackpot game as described above, and when the gaming ball 99 is thrown into the V winning port 364 in the V winning round game, the probable jackpot game is performed. When the game ball 99 is not inserted into the V winning opening 364 after the end of the game, the game is shifted to the time-saving game state after the end of the certain jackpot game. Then, in the gaming machine 10, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out in the time-saving gaming state compared to the ST-probable gaming state, either of the reach out or complete out Also, in the case where the lottery result is out of order, the probability that the variable display time becomes short tends to be rather high, and the variable display time tends to become short. In addition, the average fluctuation display time of the variable game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out is significantly shorter in the time-saving game state than in the ST-probable game state. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the average variation display time of the variable game when the ST probability variable game state is out is 10.96 seconds, whereas the average fluctuation display time of the variable game when the time reduction game state is out is The time is 2.77 seconds, and in the time-saving game state, the variable game is completed in about 1/4 of the time of the ST-probable game state (about 4 times speed). If the high-frequency support mode is ended by executing the predetermined number of variable games, it ends in a minimum of about 986 seconds (approximately 16.4 minutes) in the ST-variable game state and a minimum of about 293 seconds in the time-saving game state ( (Approximately 4.9 minutes). As described above, the high-frequency support mode in the time-saving game state can be completed in an extremely short time, which is 10 minutes or more earlier than the high-frequency support mode in the ST-variable game state. That is, in the time-saving game state, the time required to complete the same number of variable games (for example, 90 variable games that are the maximum number of time-savings and the maximum number of STs) is shorter than in the ST-variable game state.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, in the V prize round game of the probability change jackpot game, for example, the launch of the game ball 99 is stopped or the game player 99 performs a left hit to launch the game ball 99 in the left area of the game board 31, for example. Since the player intentionally generates the V-prize puncture without having the game ball 99 enter the mouth 364, it is possible to shift to the time saving game state instead of the ST certain change game state after the end of the certain change big hit game. For this reason, the player intentionally causes the V winning prize puncture in the V winning round game, so that even if the jackpot lottery result is out of the jackpot lottery, even if the jackpot lottery result is incorrect, the variable game has a shorter digestion time. You can choose to shift to your own will. This allows the player to quickly complete the high-frequency support mode even when the game time is limited by selecting the time-saving gaming state by his or her own intention.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot expectation degree in the high frequency support mode does not greatly differ between the time-saving gaming state and the ST-probable gaming state. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot expectation degree in the ST-probable game state is 63.42% common to all game setting values, whereas the jackpot expectation degree in the time-saving gaming state is the game setting value. However, it is about 61% (59.90% to 61.81%) (see FIG. 10D).

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, in the probability change jackpot game, the game state of the transition destination after the end of the jackpot game depends on whether or not the gaming ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game. The transition to the ST-probable changing game state where the jackpot expectation in the support mode is high and the variable game digestion speed is slow, and the jackpot expectation in the high-frequency support mode is slightly lower than the ST sure variable game state and the variable game digestion speed is remarkable. It can be selected by the player's intention from any of the transition to the fast time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the player can select the time-saving game state by his / her own intention, and in a situation where the game time is limited, the digestion speed of the variable game can be given priority over the jackpot expectation in the high frequency support mode. it can. Thus, the possibility of terminating the high frequency support mode within the remaining time is increased, and so-called missing can be prevented. Also, even when the time-saving game state is selected, the jackpot expectation degree in the time-saving game state is only slightly lower than the jackpot expectation degree in the ST-variable game state. The reduction in the number of times can be reduced. As a result, the player can enjoy the advantage of being able to shorten the digestion time of the variable game without significantly reducing the jackpot expectation (expected jackpot count) by selecting the time saving game state.

  In addition, it can be said that the difference between the jackpot expectation degree in each of the time saving game state and the ST probability change game state is small, and the difference in the jackpot expectation degree definitely exists between the ST probability change game state and the time saving game state. The game state is still more advantageous to the player than the time reduction game state. Therefore, in the V winning round game, it is more advantageous for the player to make the game ball 99 enter the V winning opening 364 without generating the V winning punk. However, the jackpot expectation in each of the time-saving gaming state and the ST-probable gaming state converges when a certain number of trials or more are repeated (a variable number of games or more are executed). That is, in order to reliably receive the profit from the difference in the jackpot expectation between the ST-probable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, it is necessary to execute the variable game a certain number of times or more. In other words, when there is little restriction on the game time or when there is enough time, it is still preferable to cause the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 364 without generating the V winning puncture. On the other hand, in a short game, the difference in the jackpot expectation between the time-saving game state and the ST-probable game state may not converge. In other words, even in the case of intentionally shifting to the time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game by generating a V winning puncture in the V winning round game, a situation where the number of variable games is small, for example, one high frequency support mode In the maximum number of times of support, a profit equal to or greater than the profit expected from the transition to the ST-probable game state (expected payout value) may be obtained in the time-saving game state. As described above, when the difference between the jackpot expectation degree in each of the time-saving game state and the ST-probable game state is small, the time-saving game state is more stable than the ST-probable game state with one variable frequency of high-frequency support. The possibility that a large profit can be obtained is also high, and even if the game time is restricted and the time saving game state is selected instead of the ST-probable game state with priority given to the variable game time, Can be reduced.

  For example, the random number counter C4 per figure is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 99, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is periodically updated, and is stored in the ordinary figure holding storage area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball 99 wins the through gate 316. Then, at a predetermined timing, a drawing per drawing is performed based on the value of the random number counter C4 per drawing stored in the drawing storage area 412c to determine whether or not the electric accessory 315b is to be opened for a predetermined time. Here, FIG. 12 (D) is a diagram showing an example of a general figure low probability mode success / failure table, and FIG. 12 (E) is a diagram showing an example of a general figure high probability mode success / failure table referred to in lottery per general figure. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (D), the general figure low probability mode success / failure table is referred to when the MPU 41 performs a lottery per general figure in the low frequency support mode. In the general figure low probability mode success / failure table, among the values (random number values) of the 100 random number counters C4 from 0 to 99, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the general figure lottery is the general figure is the random number value. 0. In other words, in the low frequency support mode in which the lottery per figure is executed based on the general figure low probability mode success / failure table, the probability per figure is 1/100, and the probability per figure is low. Therefore, in the normal gaming state in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 315b is hard to operate, and the gaming ball 99 is hard to enter the second winning opening 315. Note that the probability of hitting the ordinary figure in the low frequency support mode is not limited to 1/100, but may be any probability that is lower than the probability of hitting the general figure in the high frequency support mode, and may be 0%.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (E), the general figure high probability mode success / failure table is referred to when the MPU 41 performs a lottery per general figure in the high frequency support mode. In the universal figure high probability mode success / failure table, among the values (random number values) of 100 random number counters C4 from 0 to 99, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the universal figure lottery is the universal figure is the random number value. 1 to 99. That is, in the high frequency support mode in which the lottery per per-figure is executed based on the per-figure high-probability mode success / failure table, the per-figure per-prize probability is 99/100, and the per-figure per-prize probability is high. Therefore, in the ST-probable game mode and the time-saving game mode, which are the high-frequency support modes, the electric accessory 315b is easily operated, and the game ball 99 is easily inserted into the second winning port 315. In addition, the probability of hitting the ordinary figure in the high frequency support mode is not limited to 99/100, and may be 100% as long as it is higher than the probability of hitting the general figure in the high frequency support mode.

  When the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the first special symbol display unit 372 and the second special symbol display unit 373 of the main display unit 37, the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery are specified. The pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “4R normal big hit”, the MPU 41 determines that the fluctuation pattern command “A” indicating the 4R normal big hit is added before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. A01 ”to“ A03 ”are transmitted. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, the MPU 41 determines that the variation pattern command “B01” has “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability change hit before the variation patterns “01” to “03”. To “B03”. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, the MPU 41 determines that the change pattern “01” to “03” is preceded by a change pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating a 16R probability change hit. To "C03". Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D12” with “D” indicating that the lottery is out before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “12”. Send one of Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result, the symbol display unit 341. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed by are determined (see FIG. 43B). Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn off the light.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341. Will run. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

  Here, FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. In the game information storage area 412d, game information relating to a game history, payout performance, and the like are stored. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as the game information, the “number of out-balls”, “the number of general payout-payout balls”, “the first payout-number payout ball”, and “the second payout-number payout ball”. , "Variable winning opening payout number", "Game setting value", "Base information", "Consecutive bonus ratio information", "Rotary ratio information", "Cumulative jackpot lottery count", "Unit jackpot lottery count" , “The number of big hits”, and “the number of consecutive misses” are stored. Among these game information, “game setting value”, “base information”, “continuous bonus ratio information”, “gain ratio information”, and “unit jackpot lottery count” are gaming information (performance information) regarding the payout performance. ).

  The “number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired on the game board 31 in the normal game state (the special figure low probability mode and the low frequency support mode). The “number of out-balls” is stored as a value obtained by counting the number of out-balls detected by the out-ball sensor 317a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG.

  The “number of general winning opening payout balls” is an integrated value of the game balls 99 paid out for winning in the general winning opening 313 in the normal game state (the special figure low probability mode and the low frequency support mode). The “number of general payout opening payout balls” is the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 20, which will be described later, when the winning sensor 313a detects a winning in the general winning opening in the normal gaming state. In setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the general winning opening 313, the value is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current prize. .

  The “number of first winning opening payout balls” is an integrated value of the game balls 99 paid out for winning in the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state (the special figure low probability mode and the high frequency support mode). . This “number of first payout opening payout balls” is the prize ball command in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 20 described later when the winning sensor 314a detects a winning in the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to perform the payout of the number of prize balls according to the winning in the first winning port 314 in the setting process, a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current prize is set to the value. Update.

  The “number of payout balls of the second winning opening” is an integrated value of the game balls 99 paid out for winning in the second winning opening 315 in the time saving game state (the special figure low probability mode and the high frequency support mode). The “number of second payout opening payout balls” is the prize ball command in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 20 described later when the winning sensor 315a detects a win in the second winning opening 315 in the time saving game state. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to perform the payout of the number of prize balls in accordance with the prize to the second winning port 315 in the setting process, a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current prize is set to a value. Update.

  The “variable winning opening payout ball count” is an integrated value of the game balls 99 paid out for winning in the variable winning opening 353, 363 and the V winning opening 364 in the jackpot game state. The “variable winning opening payout number” is described later when the variable winning sensor 353a, 363a or the V winning sensor 364a detects a winning in the variable winning opening 353, 363 or the V winning opening 364 in the jackpot game state. In the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 20, a prize ball for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the variable winning openings 353, 363 or the V winning opening 364. When setting a command, the number of balls to be paid out by the current winning is updated to a value obtained by adding the number.

  The “set value” is used to select a special figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A) used in the jackpot lottery (win / fail judgment). In other words, the “set value” defines the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability mode. In the present embodiment, as described above, six types of special figure low probability mode success / failure tables (see FIG. 10A) having six different set values (big hit probability) are prepared. The “set value” is updated in a set value changing process in FIG. 34 described below.

  The “base information” is information relating to “base” which is a payout rate (a payout rate) in the normal game state (special figure low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and the “base” is “out” in the normal game state. This is a ratio of the total number of payout balls of the “general winning opening payout number” and the “first winning opening payout number” to the “number of balls”. When the “base” is represented by a mathematical formula, “base” = 100 × (“the number of payout balls to be paid out in general” + “the number of payouts to pay out the first winning opening”) / “the number of outgoing balls”. The “base information” includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the previous-last 60,000-ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the previous-last 60,000-ball base B2 are updated each time the number of out-balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information updating process of FIG. 35 described later (steps S2305 and S2306). Specifically, the “base” when the latest number of out-balls reaches 60,000 balls is the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the “base” when the previous out-ball number reaches 60,000 balls is: The base information of the game information storage area of the RAM 412 is stored as the base information B2 of the 60,000 coins two times before. Until the counter value of the number of out-balls reaches 60000, the current base BL is calculated (step S2304), and the current base BL is stored as “base information” in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. Further, when the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out-balls reaches 60000, the “base information” includes “the number of general payout-payout balls” and “first prize-winning mouth” described above. In addition to the "number of payout balls" and "the number of outgoing balls", the "general winning opening payout number", the "first winning opening payout number", and the "outside number" for the base calculation are stored.

  In the present embodiment, the “base information” includes the “current base BL”, the “previous 60,000-ball base B1”, and the “previous 60,000-ball base B2”. However, a base of 60,000 coins for the past three times or more may be left as a history. Further, the “base information” may include an accumulated base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

  The “continuous role ratio information” is sent to all winning ports (general winning ports 313, first winning ports 314, second winning ports 315, variable winning ports 353, 363, and V winning ports 364) for which a prize ball is paid out. Of the total number of payout balls by winning the variable winning opening 353, 363 and the V winning opening 364. When the “continuous bonus ratio” is represented by a mathematical formula, “continuous bonus ratio” = 100 × “variable winning opening payout ball count” / “total payout ball count”. The “continuous accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in a specific performance information update process in FIG. 35 described below. In the present embodiment, the “continuous bonus ratio information” is stored as the cumulative continuous bonus ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The “continuous bonus ratio information” is a period for a certain period (for example, a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), and a period until a certain number of big hit lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state. Alternatively, the ratio may be a continuous accessory ratio with respect to a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the “continuous bonus ratio information” may include both the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio for a certain number of periods.

  The “principal-ratio information” is stored in all winning ports (general winning ports 313, first winning ports 314, second winning ports 315, variable winning ports 353, 363, and V winning ports 364) for which payout of prize balls is performed. In the total payout number of winning prize, it is information on the “government ratio” which is a ratio of the total payout number of the second payout number payout number and the variable payout number payout number. When the "principal ratio" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "principal ratio" = 100.times. ("The number of second winning port payouts" + "the variable payout number payouts") / "the total number of payouts". The “accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in a specific performance information update process of FIG. 35 described later. In the present embodiment, the “accessory ratio information” is stored as an accumulated accessory ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. In addition, the "principal ratio information" is for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, The ratio of the accessory to the number of out balls may reach a certain number (for example, a period until the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls). Of course, the “continuous bonus ratio information” may include both the cumulative bonus ratio and the bonus ratio for a certain number of periods.

  The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is a number of jackpot lotteries in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the gaming hall to the present. This is the number of times it has been performed. In other words, in the “cumulative jackpot lottery count”, the first special symbol display portion 372 of the main display portion 37 is changed to display the first special symbol change display triggered by the winning in the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. It is also the cumulative fluctuation display count. The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is incremented by 1 each time the first special symbol display unit 372 starts the variable display of the first special symbol in step S2014 in the special figure variation start process in FIG. The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is cleared from the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  The “unit jackpot lottery count” is the number of times a jackpot lottery was triggered by a prize in the first winning port 314 for a certain number of minus difference balls in a normal game state (special figure low probability mode and low frequency support mode). (The number of times the first symbol change display of the first special symbol display unit 372 has been executed). In the present embodiment, the predetermined number is “250 balls”, and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting “the number of general payout payouts” and “the first payout payout number” from the “outside payout”. That is, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is a variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 372 of the average of 1,000 yen in the normal gaming state when 250 balls are lent for 1000 yen in the game hall. It is the number of times of display (the number of times the jackpot was received). In addition, the “unit jackpot lottery count” may be the number of times a large number of jackpot lotteries have been received for a certain number of “out balls” in the normal gaming state. The “unit jackpot lottery count” is updated in a specific performance information update process in FIG. 35 described below. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is stored as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The “unit jackpot lottery count” refers to a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot counts (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in a normal game state, It may be for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the “number of unit jackpot lotteries”, both the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count and the unit jackpot lottery count in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

  The “number of jackpots” is the number of times the lottery results in the jackpot lottery performed from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the start of the operation of the gaming hall to the present until the present have become a jackpot. The “number of big hits” is incremented by 1, for example, when the big hit game start flag is set to on in step S1811 of the variable game control process of FIG. The “number of jackpots” is cleared from the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  The “number of consecutive misses” is the number of times that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery have consecutively missed in the special figure low probability mode (normal game state (low frequency support mode) and time saving game state (high frequency support mode)). Yes, if the lottery result is a big hit, it is cleared to 0 times. The “number of consecutive misses” is the first special symbol or the second special symbol display unit 372 or the second special symbol display unit 373 of the main display unit 37 in step S2014 in the special figure change start process in FIG. (2) When the special symbol variation display is started, if the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning is based on the special figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A) in step S2003 is out of order, one is added. Cleared to zero if the result is a jackpot. In the present embodiment, the “number of consecutive misses” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10. Of course, the “number of consecutive misses” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 8, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” and “game setting values” stored as game information (performance information) in a game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. is there. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a game set value display unit 45, a set value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the performance information display device 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the performance display monitor 43 displays "base information" on the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a position where the inner frame 12 can be viewed when the inner frame 12 is expanded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 includes a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a four-digit seven-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. May be provided. It is also conceivable to display “base information” using the first special symbol display section 372 or the second special symbol display section 373 of the main display section 37.

  The seven-segment displays 431 to 434 can display numbers “0” to “9” and alphabets “A” to “F”. In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when displaying the alphabet “B”, a dot is turned on to display “8.” to distinguish it from the number “8”, and the alphabet “D” is displayed. When displaying, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number “0” and “0.” is displayed. Also, when displaying any one of the alphabets “A” to “F”, it is also conceivable to turn on a dot to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

  In the performance display monitor 43, the left seven-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are identification segments in which the “base type” is indicated by an abbreviation symbol, and the right two seven-segments. The display units 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, if the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation symbol “BL” of the current base BL is “8.” and “L” in the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 that are the identification segments. And the base value “31” is displayed as “3” and “1” on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 as the ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display “8.”, “L”, “3”, and “1” in order from the left.

  The performance display switch 44 switches on and off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) collectively by a pressing operation, and is located at an easily operable position with the inner frame 12 expanded. (See FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When an operation for turning on the power is performed on the performance display switch 44, power is supplied to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when an operation of turning off the power is performed on the performance display switch 44, the power supply to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed. . The performance display switch 44 may be provided other than the main control device 4.

  Here, FIG. 15A is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so that the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 15B to 15D, when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, as long as the performance display switch 44 is not turned off, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 is used as “base information”. The ball base B1 → the 60,000 ball base B2 before last time → the current base BL is sequentially looped, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 15B, the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 15C, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 34%, and FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 7, the 60,000-ball base B2 is 32% twice before. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

  A program required to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program for calculating the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the previous 60,000-ball base B2, A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the previous-last 60,000-ball base B2 at regular intervals is stored in the ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main controller 4. Thus, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in the ROM 411. Further, a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

  Also, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of or in addition to the "base information", the game information is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous bonus ratio information" or "principal ratio information". Other performance information may be displayed.

  Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by a display of another form such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 14, the game setting value display section 45 displays the above-mentioned game setting value for selecting the special figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A) referred to in the jackpot lottery. And a 7-segment display. The game setting value display section 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display. Game setting values may be displayed.

  The setting value change operation unit 46 switches on / off of the power of the 7-segment display by a pressing operation, and enables a change of the game setting value by being rotated when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The setting value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, for example, and a function as a rotary switch that switches contacts by a rotating operation (rotation at a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a display example on the game setting value display section 45 of the main control device.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the game setting value display section 45 is turned off and a pressing operation is performed on the setting value change operation section 46, the game setting value is turned on by turning on the 7-segment display. A number is displayed on the display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current game setting value. In the illustrated example, the game setting value is “1”. On the other hand, when the game setting value display section 45 is turned on and a pressing operation is performed on the setting value change operation section 46, the power supply to the 7-segment display is cut off and the game setting value display section 45 is turned off. State.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the game setting value display section 45 is turned on and a rotation operation is performed on the setting value change operation section 46, the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 changes. Is done. In the illustrated example, when the game setting value display section 45 is rotated right, the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 is increased, and when the game setting value display section 45 is rotated left, the game setting value display is performed. The number displayed on the part 45 becomes smaller. When the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 is changed by rotating the game setting value display section 45, the changed number is stored as the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. You. Therefore, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the number corresponding to the target game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45 and the power of the 7-segment display is turned off, the power is turned off. The number displayed immediately before being turned off is determined as the game setting value. Thereby, the MPU 41 can perform the jackpot lottery based on the special figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A) selected according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. it can.

  Note that the method of changing the game setting value is not limited to the method of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 after rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. For example, a method of determining the game setting value by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), or by continuously hitting or long pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) A method of changing the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 and then turning off the game setting value display section 45, by inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4 and rotating the key. A method of changing the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 and then removing the key may be used.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 8, the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6. Execute the effect display.

[Sound lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds used in variable game effects and big hit game effects, lamp blinking patterns, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The sound lamp control device 5 executes a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, and sends a command to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal), and controls the display of the symbol display section 341. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 controls the reproduction audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the reproduction sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when performing a variable game effect and a jackpot game effect described later.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface for inputting a signal to the audio ramp control device 5 and outputting a control signal from the audio ramp control device 5. Specifically, the main controller 4 and the display controller 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, the main controller 4 sends the voice lamp controller 5 a special figure change pattern command, a first special figure hold command, a second special figure hold command, a special figure shift command, a big hit game start command, a round game start command, Commands such as a winning round pre-game interval start command, a V winning command, an ending start command, and a jackpot game end command are input. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display change pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the sound lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. A configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also considered as another embodiment.

  The speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. An operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated based on the detection signal from the operation switch 20a. Note that the MPU 51 may individually determine not only the presence or absence of an operation on the operation button 20 but also that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started, that the operation is continued, and that the operation has been completed. Good. This makes it possible to determine whether the operation on the operation button 20 is a single-hit operation, a continuous-hit operation, or a long-press operation. The operation switch 20a may be connected to the input / output I / F 42 of the main control device 4.

  The MPU 51 executes a predetermined calculation process based on commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main controller 4 (see FIG. 29).

  Specifically, when a fluctuation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the fluctuation pattern command, displays a fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of decorative symbols (see FIG. 43A)), a fluctuation display time, and a fluctuation type (FIG. 43). (B)) and the effect pattern type (see FIGS. 44 (A) to 44 (C)) are determined, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (FIG. 42). In step S2605 in the command determination process of the above, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, if the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation is stopped and displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the audio lamp controller 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like. The audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Note that the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built therein. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for receiving an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, a plurality of types of images such as decorative symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341 and images such as a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, and a departure effect image are stored. ing. The images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include a still image and a moving image. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type and display timing of the image to be used, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing symbol variation display and effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the game balls 99 from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. And a payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls 99 to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls 99 by controlling the driving unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as a clogged ball of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls 99 corresponding to the amount set in advance within the range of the amount of money to be lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls 99 is input from the ball rental device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 and the predetermined number of game balls 99 will be paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls 99 according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 while the firing handle 22 is being rotated, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to be fired by the firing rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the firing control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the firing handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation amount, so that the game ball 99 on the shooting rail 321 is transferred to the game board 31. Fire at it. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball 99 is fired toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

  The firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. Accordingly, the firing control IC 81 determines, based on the voltage value input in accordance with the amount of rotation of the firing handle 22, that the greater the amount of rotation of the firing handle 22, the greater the intensity of the launch of the game ball 99 from the game ball firing mechanism 32. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that the pressure becomes stronger.

  Further, the firing handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and a ball stop switch for the player to perform an operation for stopping the firing of the game ball 99 arbitrarily. 21b is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the firing handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or that the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the firing of the game balls 99 by the game ball firing mechanism 32 is stopped. Thereby, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game in a situation where the player does not touch the firing handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with a thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12 V voltage for driving various sensors and driving units, a +5 V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12 V or +5 V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erase switch 91 which is operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by electric power supplied from power supply equipment. Thus, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period.

  Further, when determining that the power supply has been interrupted, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24 V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power failure state occurs when the DC voltage reaches a preset voltage of less than 22 V. Judge. When receiving the power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interruption process.

[Processing of Main Controller 4]
Next, a process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is a startup process started when the power is turned on, a main process executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process started periodically, and executed when a power failure occurs. It performs NMI interrupt processing and the like. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like is omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the MPU 41 determines the detection states of the winning sensors 313a to 315a, the gate passing sensor 316a, the out ball sensor 317a, the variable winning sensors 353a and 363a, the V winning sensor 364a, and the like. At this time, when any of the winning sensors 313a to 315a, the variable winning sensors 353a, 363a, and the V winning sensor 364a is detected as having entered the game ball 99, the MPU 41 uses that information as the winning detection information. To save. When the passage of the game ball 99 through the through gate 316 is detected by the gate passage sensor 316a, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as gate passage detection information. When an out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 317a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the out ball number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the out ball number in the game information storage area 412d. I do.

<Step S1002>
Subsequently, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary figure random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to each of the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary figure random number counter C4, and the counter value reaches the maximum value. If so, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a special figure start winning process associated with winning in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the special figure start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, the launch control process is based on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for enabling the firing of 99. Further, the firing control process invalidates the firing of the game ball 99 when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player does not touch the firing handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the processing to be performed. When the launch of the game ball 99 is valid, the MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball 99.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 is to be in the electric open state based on the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure stored in the ordinary figure holding storage area 412c. A through gate process in which a winning lottery is executed is executed. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, when the low frequency support mode is set, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the per-figure drawing is per-figure when the random number per per-figure counter C4 is 0. When C4 is 1 to 99, it is determined that the lottery result in the per-lot drawing is out of order (see FIG. 12D). Also, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the per-figure drawing is per-figure when the random number per per-figure counter C4 is 1 to 99, and When the counter C4 is 0, it is determined that the lottery result in the lottery per figure is out of place (see FIG. 12E). Then, if the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the per-figure drawing is per-figure in the through gate process, the MPU 41 keeps the electric accessory 315b open for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win a prize in the second winning opening 315 in which the electric accessory 315b is juxtaposed.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the special figure start winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and determines that there is no winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ) And the process moves to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special figure reserved number N stored in the first special figure reserved number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the first special figure reserved number N is the maximum reserved number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106. On the other hand, if the first special figure reservation number N is not the maximum reservation number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the first special figure reservation number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, and is updated in a main process of FIG. The counter value with the variation type counter CS1 (steps S1302 and S1313) is acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first special figure first storage area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. It is stored in the first empty reservation area of the first special figure fourth reservation area REA4.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the hit / fail information before the hit / fail information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 is subjected to the jackpot success / failure determination in the later-described special figure change start process (see FIG. 27). Based on the result of the confirmation, the first special figure suspension command setting processing for setting the first special figure suspension command in the RAM 412 is executed. The details of the first special figure pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has been made to the second winning opening 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and determines that there is no winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No). ), The special figure starting prize processing is ended, and the processing shifts to the step S1005 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special figure reserved number M stored in the second special figure reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the second special figure reserved number M is the maximum reserved number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the special figure start prize processing, and proceeds to step S1005 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Move to On the other hand, if the second special figure reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the second special figure reserved number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, and is updated in a main process of FIG. The counter value with the variation type counter CS1 (steps S1302 and S1313) is obtained, and the counter value is stored in the second special figure first storage area REB1 of the second special figure storage area REB of the special figure storage area 412b in the RAM 412. It is stored in the first empty reservation area of the second special figure fourth reservation area REB4.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 updates the content of the hit / failure information before the hit / failure information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is determined as a jackpot success / failure in a special figure change start process (see FIG. 27) described later. After confirming, based on the confirmation result, a second special figure suspension command setting process for setting the second special figure suspension command in the RAM 412 is executed. Here, the second special figure hold command setting processing is the same as the first special figure hold command setting processing described later with reference to FIG. 19, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the second special figure hold command setting process, the “first special figure hold command” is replaced with the “second special figure hold command” and the “first special figure hold number” in the first special figure hold command setting processing of FIG. N ”may be read as“ the second special figure reservation number M ”.

[First special figure pending command setting processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special figure hold command setting processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the special figure start winning processing of FIG. The first special figure suspension command includes information indicating that the command is the first special figure suspension command, the type of the first special figure suspension command (big hit type or off), the variation pattern, and the first special figure suspension command. Information such as the number of holds N is included. Hereinafter, the first special figure suspension command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 19, the MPU 41 reads out the first special figure reservation number N from the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, and reads the first special figure first The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the reserved areas REA1 to the first special figure fourth reserved area REA4 is read from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current mode is the special figure high probability mode. If the special figure high probability mode is selected (step S1202: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1203. If not (in the special figure low probability mode) (step S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1204. Whether or not the special figure high probability mode is set is determined based on whether or not the special figure high probability mode flag set to on in step S2151 of the big hit game control process of FIG. 32 described later is set to on.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the special figure high-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10B) and, based on the special figure high-probability mode success / failure table, reads the counter of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201. A determination is made as to whether the value is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the special figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A) stored according to the game setting value in step S2212 in the game setting value changing process in FIG. Based on the special figure low probability mode success / failure table, a success / failure determination is made as to whether or not the counter value of the big hit random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the big hit winning.

  In step S1204, a win / fail determination is performed based on the special figure low probability mode success / failure table stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S2212 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 34 described later. After reading the game setting value stored in step S2210 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 34 described below, the special figure low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the game setting value is selected one by one to determine the success / failure. You may.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read from is not the value corresponding to the jackpot (step S1205: NO), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, in the case where the winning / failing information is stored in the first special figure third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the special figure start winning processing of FIG. 18, the winning / failing information stored in the first special figure third holding area REA3. Are read out from the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 included in the data. It should be noted that, among the first special figure first reservation area REA1 to the first special figure fourth reservation area REA4, the reservation area in which the hit / fail information is stored in step S1104 in the special figure start winning processing of FIG. The determination can be made based on the value of the first special figure reservation number N stored in the number storage area NAA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the first special figure suspension number N in a first special figure suspension command. As described above, since the first special figure hold command includes the first special figure hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 that receives the first special figure hold command, By referring to the first special figure hold number N included in the one special figure hold command, the first special figure hold command can be changed to any one of the first special figure first hold area REA1 to the first special figure fourth hold area REA4. It is possible to recognize whether the information corresponds to the pass / fail information stored in.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the first special figure hold number N in the first special figure hold command (step S1209).

  The first special figure hold command set to ON in the first special figure hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in a main process of FIG. In step S1301, it is deleted after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with another command. Further, the content of the first special figure hold command described here is merely an example, and if the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the first special figure hold command, it will be described here. Not limited to things. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first special figure suspension command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, a main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1310 is executed as a periodic processing of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S1311 to S1313 is executed with the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1310 to the next cycle. You.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process or the previous main process of FIG. 17 to a control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Executes the external output process to be sent to. For example, in the RAM 412, a special figure change pattern command, a first special figure holding command, a second special figure holding command, a special figure shift command, a big hit game start command, a round game start command, a V winning round interval game start command, and a V winning When a command such as a command, an ending start command, and a jackpot game end command is set, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a winning ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 wins a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 353, 363, and a V winning opening 364 based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not has occurred. If a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, in the normal gaming state (the special figure low probability mode and the low frequency support mode), when a prize is generated in the general prize port 313 or the first prize port 314, the MPU 41 stores the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of paid-out balls due to the current prize. In the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) or the ST-probable-change game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode), the MPU 41 determines whether the second winning opening 315 has a prize. The second payout number of payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current winning. Further, in the case of the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 determines the number of variable payout payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when a winning is generated in the variable payouts 353, 363 and the V payout opening 364. The number of payout balls by this prize is updated to the added value.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a general-purpose game control process for controlling a game in the general-purpose game. The details of the ordinary figure game control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23. In the ordinary figure game control processing, a lottery per ordinary figure is executed, and the ordinary symbol display unit 371 displays the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol. Is performed. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the lottery result per lottery drawing in the RAM 412 based on the random number per lottery counter C4 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a per-figure-per-game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the per-figure per-game. The details of the per-figure per game control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. The game ball 99 is allowed to enter the second winning opening 315 for a fixed time.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling a game in the variable game. Although the details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, in the variable game control process, if there is a first special figure or a second special figure reservation, the special figure reservation storage area 412b And controlling the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display portion 372 or the second special symbol display portion 373 based on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and A process of setting a variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the decorative symbol by the symbol display unit 341 is executed.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. The details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game including the opening, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the variable prize door 352 or the V prize door 362 in the normal round game in which the variable prize device 35 is activated or the V prize round game in which the V prize device 36 is activated. Then, the game is executed by the number according to the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type) which triggered the shift to the jackpot game. In the big hit game control process, a command for starting or ending the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, and the ending effect is set in the symbol display unit 341 or the like.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a game setting value change process. In this game setting value change processing, processing for controlling display or non-display of the game setting value or change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d is performed according to an operation on the setting value change operation unit 46. You. The details of the game setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process. However, a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, or a period from after the startup process until the launch of the game ball 99 is started. It is also conceivable that the processing is limited to the above. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game setting value cannot be changed until the next power-on, so that the game setting value is changed within the business hours of the game hall. Can be prevented.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes a specific performance information update process of the game information. In the specific performance information update process, at least the base information is updated as the specific performance information, and the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like are updated as necessary. Details of the specific performance information update processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 executes a display control process of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1309 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. The details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1311: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301, and executes each process from S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1311: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time up to this point, steps S1311, S1312, and S1313 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has come (step S1311: Yes).

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1313>
In step S1313, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. After updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1311.

[Public figure game control processing]
In the general-purpose game control process, a process for advancing a general-purpose game that specifies the lottery result in the general-purpose lottery performed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 316 is executed. Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the general-purpose game control process. Hereinafter, the general-purpose game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the general-purpose game execution flag is set to ON. The ordinary figure game execution flag is a flag indicating that the ordinary figure game is being executed, that is, the ordinary symbol is changing in the ordinary symbol display unit 371, and is used in the ordinary figure change start process in FIG. Is set to on in step S1609. The MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1407 when the flag for executing the general-purpose game is set to ON (step S1401: Yes), and sets the flag for executing the general-purpose game to OFF (step S1401: No), the process moves to step S1402.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON. The electric accessory opening flag is a flag indicating that the actuation of the electric accessory 315b provided in the second winning opening 315 allows the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315. It is set to on in step S1704 in the game control process for ordinary drawing per FIG. 24 described later. When the electric accessory opening flag is set to ON (step S1402: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the general-purpose game control process, and when the electric accessory opening flag is set to OFF. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1403. In other words, the general-purpose game is not executed during the execution of the general-purpose game and during the opening of the electric accessory 315b (during the execution of the general-purpose game).

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON. The jackpot game execution flag is set to a jackpot game in which the variable prize device 35 or the V prize device 36 is operated to allow the game ball 99 to enter the variable prize port 353, 363 or the V prize port 364. This flag is set to ON in step S2104 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 28 described below. When the big hit game in progress flag is set to on (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the general-purpose game control process, and when the big hit game in progress flag is set to off (step S1403). : No), the process moves to step S1404. That is, the regular game is not executed during the execution of the jackpot game.

<Step S1404>
When all of the general-figure game execution flag, the electric accessory opening flag, and the big-hit game execution flag are set to OFF (No in all of steps S1401 to S1403), ie, the general-figure game, the general-figure game If neither the jackpot game nor the jackpot game has been executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number L of general figure reservations stored in the general figure reservation number storage area NAC of the general figure reservation storage area 412c is 0. (Step S1404). The MPU 41 ends the general figure game control processing when the general figure reservation number L is 0 (Step S1404: Yes), and ends the processing when the general figure reservation number L is not 0 (Step S1404: No). The process moves to S1405.

<Steps S1405 and S1406>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a general symbol data setting process for updating the data stored in the general symbol holding storage area 412c, and furthermore, executes a variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display unit 371 based on the pass / fail information. Then, a normal figure change start process is performed to cause the process to start (step S1406). Note that the details of the general figure data setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, and the details of the general figure change start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S1407 and S1408>
When the general-figure game execution flag is set to ON (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 uses the normal symbol display unit 371 set in step S1603 or S1605 of the general-figure change start process in FIG. The value of the ordinary symbol variation counter indicating the remaining time of the ordinary symbol variation display is decremented by 1 (step S1407), and whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol variation counter after the subtraction is 0, that is, in the ordinary symbol display unit 371. It is determined whether the fluctuation display time has elapsed since the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol was started (step S1408). When the value of the ordinary figure variation counter is 0 (when the variation display time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed) (step S1408: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1409, and the variation display time has elapsed. If not (step S1408: No), the general-purpose game control process ends.

<Step S1409>
If the value of the ordinary figure variation counter is 0 (if the ordinary symbol variation display time has elapsed) (step S1408: Yes), the MPU 41 starts in step S1608 of the ordinary figure variation start process in FIG. The variable display of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 371 is stopped and displayed with the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol game (step S1409).

<Steps S1410 to S1413>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 sets the general-figure game execution flag to off, and determines whether the general-figure hit flag is set to on (step S1411). Here, the general symbol hit flag is a flag indicating that the lottery result in the general symbol lottery for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 371 stopped and displayed in step S1409 is a hit, and will be described later. In step S1607 in the normal symbol variation start process in FIG. 23, the flag is set to ON when the variation of the ordinary symbol starts. If the per-figure flag is set to on (step S1410: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the per-figure per game start flag to on (step S1412), and further sets the per-figure per flag to off (step S1412). S1413), and ends the general-purpose game control process. This flag is used to start the per-chart game start flag, and is referred to when determining whether or not to start the per-chart per-game in step S1701 in the per-chart game control process of FIG. 24 described later. On the other hand, if the general figure flag is set to off (step S1412: No), that is, if the lottery result in the general figure lottery is out of order, the MPU 41 ends the general figure game control process.

[Public figure data setting processing]
In the general-figure data setting process, when starting a general-figure hitting game, a setting process relating to hit / fail information in the general-figure hold storage area 412c is executed. Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the general-purpose data setting process. Hereinafter, the ordinary figure data setting processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S1501 and S1502>
As shown in FIG. 22, in step S1501, the MPU 41 subtracts one from the number of ordinary figure reservations L stored in the number of ordinary figure reservations storage area NAC, and shifts the number of ordinary figure first reservation area NE1 to the ordinary figure execution area NAE. The pass / fail information is moved (step S1502).

<Step S1503>
In step S1503, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the general-purpose second reservation area NE2 to the general-purpose fourth reservation area NE4 one by one, and ends the general-purpose data setting process. Specifically, the MPU 41 moves the hit / fail information of the second-reservation area NE2 to the first-reservation area NE1 and moves the rejection information of the third-reservation area NE3 to the second-reservation area NE2. Then, the pass / fail information of the fourth reserved area NE4 is moved to the third reserved area NE3.

[Public figure fluctuation start processing]
In the general symbol change start process, a process is performed to cause the normal symbol display unit 371 to perform a variable display of the normal symbol based on the winning / failing information stored in the general symbol execution area NAE of the general symbol holding storage area 412c. Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the ordinary figure change start process. Hereinafter, the ordinary figure change start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the high frequency support mode flag is set to ON. The high-frequency support mode flag is used to support the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 with high frequency (high probability) when the electric accessory 315b provided in the second winning opening 315 is operated at high frequency. This flag indicates that the high-frequency support mode is set, and is set to ON in step S2171 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 33 described later. If the high frequency support mode flag is on (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1602, and if the high frequency support mode flag is off (step S1601: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1604. Transition.

<Steps S1602 to S1605>
When the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 has a high probability that the lottery result of the lottery information pertaining to the success / failure information moved to the general-figure execution area NAE and the general-figure lottery will be per-figure. (99%) A lottery result per lottery drawing is determined based on the general figure high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 12E) (step S1602). Further, the MPU 41 sets the value of the variable display time counter indicating the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 371 in the normal symbol game in the variable display time in the short time mode (for example, 0.1 second to The value is set to a value corresponding to (time determined from a range of 5 seconds) (step S1603). Then, when the setting of the value of the variable display time counter ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1606.

  On the other hand, when the high frequency support mode flag is off (in the case of the low frequency support mode) (step S1601: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery has been moved to the general figure execution area NAE, and It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a lottery result based on the low-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 12D) having a low probability (1%) of the lottery result being a per-figure (step S1604). . Further, the MPU 41 sets the value of the variable display time counter indicating the remaining time of the variable display time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display unit 371 in the ordinary symbol game in the variable display time in the long time mode (for example, 1 second to 1000 seconds). (Time longer than the short-time mode determined from the range) (step S1605). Then, when the setting of the value of the variable display time counter ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1606.

  Here, in the high frequency support mode (ST probable game state and the time saving game state), the probability that the lottery result in the per-floor drawing is per-figure is higher than in the low-frequency support mode (normal game state). Instead, the fluctuation display time of ordinary symbols in ordinary game is shortened. In this way, the high frequency support can be realized by the high probability that the lottery result in the per-figure drawing will be per-figure. In addition, since the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the normal figure game is short, more suspension of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be secured more, and the second special figure suspension number M can be suppressed from becoming zero. Therefore, the high-frequency support mode can be effectively and quickly digested.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol (the execution time of the normal game) is different between the high-frequency support mode (ST-probable game state and the time-saving game state) and the low-frequency support mode (normal game state). However, the same time may be set in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In this case, in order to reduce the frequency of support by the electric accessory 315b in the low-frequency support mode, the probability per ordinary figure may be set to an extremely low probability (for example, 0% to 0.5%).

  In the present embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol is the same regardless of whether the game is in the ST-probable game mode or the time-saving game mode in the high-frequency support mode. The fluctuation display time of the normal symbol may be made different from the time-saving game state. In this case, it is conceivable that the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state is set shorter than the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the ST sure change game state. In this way, by setting the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol in the time saving game state to be shorter than the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol in the ST-probable game state, the suspension of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second special figure) It is possible to secure a larger number of reservations M) in the time-saving gaming state than in the ST-probable gaming state. Thereby, the digestion speed of the high frequency support mode in the time saving game state can be made faster than the digestion speed of the high frequency support mode in the ST sure change game state. Therefore, when the high-frequency support mode is terminated by executing the variable number of games (or executing the jackpot lottery) the specified number of times, the time-saving game state can be ended earlier than the ST-variable game state. Here, the average fluctuation display time (average normal game time) of the ordinary symbol in the time saving game state is, for example, 75 times the average fluctuation display time (average normal game time) of the ordinary symbol in the ST sure change game state. %, Preferably 50% or less, more preferably 40% or less, and still more preferably 30% or less. As described above, the average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol in the time-saving gaming state is in the above range with respect to the average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol in the ST-variable gaming state, and the second prize for giving a chance of a jackpot lottery is provided. The frequency with which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the mouth 315 can have a significant difference between the time-saving game state and the ST-probable game state. As a result, in the time-saving game state, compared to the ST-probable game state, more shift determinations can be received within the same time, and more variable games can be executed. When the time-saving game state or the ST-probable game state is ended by executing the upper limit jackpot lottery or the variable game, the time required for the time-saving game state to be completed is determined by the time the ST-probable game state ends. A clear difference can be provided for the time required. Therefore, for example, when there is a restriction on the player's playing time, the player wants to give priority to the average variation display time (variable number of games per unit time) in the variable game over the high jackpot probability. If you do, you can certainly meet that desire. Further, the average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbols in the time-saving game state is set to, for example, 1% or more, preferably 5% or more, with respect to the average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbols in the ST-variable game state. As described above, the average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol in the time reduction game state is in the above range with respect to the average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol in the ST sure variation game state, so that the average fluctuation of the ordinary symbol in the time reduction game state is obtained. It is possible to prevent the display time (average game time of normal game) from becoming extremely short. In the case where the normal symbol variation display time (the game time of the ordinary figure game) set in the time-saving game state or the ST-variable game state is one, the one variation display time (the ordinary figure game time) is the average variation. It becomes the display time (average game time).

<Steps S1606 and S1607>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1604 is per-usual. If the result of the hit determination is the per-figure (step S1606: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the per-figure flag indicating that the lottery result in the per-figure per-lot drawing is per-figure (step S1607). ) And the process moves to step S1608. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not the per-figure drawing (step S1606: No), that is, if the lottery result in the per-figure drawing is out of order, the MPU 41 does not set the per-figure perflag flag on (off). , And the process moves to step S1608.

<Step S1608 and Step S1609>
In step S1608, the MPU 41 causes the normal symbol display unit 371 to start displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol, sets the flag for executing the general symbol game to ON (step S1609), and ends the normal fluctuation start process.

[Public per game control processing]
In the per-figure-per-game control processing, processing for advancing per-figure-per-game performed when the lottery result of the per-figure per-lottery is a win is executed. In the normal winning game, the opening of the electric accessory 315b opens the second winning opening 315, and the entering of the game ball 99 in the second winning opening 315 is allowed. Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ordinary figure-based game control process. In the following, the game control process per ordinary figure will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the per-figure-per-game start flag set in step S1412 in FIG. 21 is turned on. The per-figure per game start flag indicates that when the electric accessory 315b for opening / closing the second perforation opening 315 is opened, the per-figure per-game that allows the game ball 99 to enter the second perforation opening 315 is started. This is a flag to be performed. The MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1702 if the per-figure-per-game start flag is on (step S1701: Yes), and proceeds to step S1702 if the per-figure-per-game start flag is off (step S1701: No). The process moves to S1706.

<Steps S1702 to S1705>
When the per-figure-per-game start flag is on (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 opens the electric accessory 315b (step S1702), and the electric accessory opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the electric accessory 315b. Is set (step S1703). Then, the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory open flag to ON (step S1704), sets the general per game start flag to off (step S1705), and ends the general per game control process.

<Step S1706>
If the per-figure-per-game start flag is off (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 sets the on-state in step S1704 and opens the electric accessory 315b (the per-figure-per-game is being executed). It is determined whether or not the electric accessory opening flag shown is set to ON (step S1706). If the electric accessory opening flag is on (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1707, and if the electric accessory opening flag is off (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 determines that The win game control process ends.

<Step S1707>
If the electric accessory opening flag is ON (step S1706: YES), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the electric accessory opening time counter set in step S1703 (step S1707), and the electric accessory after the subtraction. It is determined whether the value of the open time counter is 0 (step S1708). That is, when the electric accessory 315b is being opened, it is determined whether or not it is time to close the second winning opening 315 by closing the electric accessory 315b. If the value of the electric accessory opening time counter is 0 (step S1708: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1709, and if the value of the electric accessory opening time counter is not 0 (step S1708: No) ), And ends the normal figure hit game control processing.

<Steps S1709 and S1710>
If the value of the electric accessory opening time counter is 0 (step S1708: YES), the MPU 41 closes the electric accessory 315b because it can determine that it is time to operate the electric accessory 315b to close (step S1709). Thereby, the entry of the game ball 99 to the second winning port 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory opening flag to OFF (step S1710), and ends the per-figure-per-game control process.

[Variable game control processing]
In the variable game control process, when there is the first special figure or the second special figure reservation, the special figure reservation storage area 412b is updated, and the first special symbol display section 372 or The process of controlling the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 373 and the process of setting the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 are executed. You. Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variable game control process. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1801, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is playing a jackpot game. If the gaming machine 10 is playing a jackpot game (step S1801: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the variable game control process. When the game is over and the big hit is not being played (step S1801: No), the process proceeds to step S1802. The execution of the jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game execution flag set to ON in step S2104 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 28 described below.

<Step S1802>
In step S1802, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner based on the special figure variable display flag, and turns on the special figure variable display flag (in the first special symbol). If the symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (step S1802: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1806, and the special figure fluctuating display flag is turned off (the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not displayed). If the display is “variable display” (step S1802: No), the process proceeds to step S1803. Note that the special figure change display flag is set to ON in step S2015 in the special figure change start process in FIG. 27 described below, and is turned off in step S1809 when the change display time has elapsed (step S1807: Yes). Is set.

<Step S1803>
If the special figure change display flag is OFF (step S1802: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the first special figure reserved number N stored in the first special figure reserved number storage area NAA of the special figure reserved storage area 412b is used. It is determined whether both of the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB are 0 (step S1803). Here, when both the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M are 0 (step S1803: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the special figure variable game control process. In other words, if neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in the variable display, and there is neither the variable hold of the first special figure nor the change hold of the second special figure, the special figure variable game control process ends. I do. On the other hand, when one of the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1803: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1804.

<Step S1804>
If one of the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1803: No), the MPU 41 deletes the data of the hit / failure information stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. A special figure data setting process to be shifted is executed (step S1804). Upon ending the special figure data setting processing, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1805. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1805>
In step S1805, the MPU 41 executes a special figure variation start process for starting the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the hit / failure information and causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform the variation display of the decorative symbol. Then, the special figure variable game control process is terminated. The details of the special figure change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1806 and Step S1807>
If the special figure change display flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the special figure change time counter set in step S2014 of the special figure change start process in FIG. 27 (step S1806). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter is 0 (step S1807). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and whether or not it is the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter is 0 (step S1807: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1808, and if the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter is not 0 (step S1807: No), The game control processing ends.

<Steps S1808 and S1809>
When the value of the special figure variable time counter is 0 (step S1807: Yes), the MPU 41 corresponds to the variable game in the first special symbol display section 372 or the second special symbol display section 373 of the main display section 37. The first special symbol or the second special symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery is stopped and displayed (step S1808), and the special figure change display flag is set to off (step S1809).

<Steps S1810 and S1811>
In step S1810, the MPU 51 determines whether the big hit type flag is set to ON. The jackpot type flag is a flag that indicates the jackpot type that is set to ON in step S2005 of the special figure change start process in FIG. 27 described later when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The jackpot type includes a 4R regular jackpot flag, a 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and a 16R probability variable jackpot flag. If any of these flags is set to ON, it is determined that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. I can judge. If the big hit type flag is set to ON (step S1810: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the big hit start flag to ON (step S1811), and ends the variable game control process. The jackpot start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game, and is referred to in step S2101 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 28 described later to determine whether to start the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the big hit type flag is set to off (step S1810: No), the MPU 51 ends the variable game control process.

[Special figure data setting processing]
The special figure data setting process is a process executed in step S1804 of the variable game control process of FIG. This special figure data setting processing is processing for updating information in the special figure reservation storage area 412b when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure reserved number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and the second special figure reserved number M is 0. If there is (Step S1901: Yes), the process moves to Step S1902. On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (Step S1901: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to Step S1905.

<Steps S1902 to S1904>
When the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA (step S1902). ), The corresponding information is moved from the first special figure first holding area REA1 to the special figure execution area RAE (step S1903). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit / fail information of the first special figure second holding area REA2 to the first special figure fourth holding area REA4 one by one (step S1904). Specifically, in step S1904, the hit / fail information of the first special figure / second hold area REA2 is moved to the first special figure / first hold area REA1, and the hit / fail information of the first special figure third hold area REA3 is shifted to the first special figure / third hold area REA3. The information is moved to the second reserved area REA2 in the figure, and the success / failure information of the first special figure fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the first special figure third reserved area REA3. When the processing in step S1904 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1908.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
If the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB (step S1905). Then, the hit information is moved from the second special figure first holding area REB1 to the special figure execution area RAE (step S1906). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit / fail information of the second special figure second holding area REB2 to the second special figure fourth holding area REB4 one by one (step S1907). Specifically, in step S1907, the hit / fail information of the second special map second holding area REB2 is moved to the second special map first holding area REB1, and the hit / fail information of the second special map third holding area REB3 is shifted to the second special map third holding area REB3. The second special figure fourth reservation area REB4 is moved to the second special figure third reservation area REB3. When the processing in step S1907 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1908.

<Step S1908>
In step S1908, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special figure first reservation area REA1 to the first special figure fourth reservation area REA4 or the second special figure first reservation area REB1 or the second special figure fourth reservation area REB4 is valid. A special figure shift command indicating that the shift has been performed is set in the RAM 412. Then, the special figure shift command set in step S1908 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 of the next main processing (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display section 341 is changed. When the processing in step S1908 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting processing, and shifts the processing to step S1805 in FIG.

[Special figure change start processing]
In the special figure variation start process, a process for starting the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the hit / failure information and causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed. Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special figure change start process. Hereinafter, the special figure change start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether the special figure high probability mode flag is on. The special figure high probability mode flag is a flag indicating the special figure high probability mode in which the jackpot lottery is executed based on the special figure high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10B). When the game ball 99 enters the V winning port 364 in the V winning round game, it is set to ON (see steps S2147 to S2151 of the big hit game control process in FIG. 32). When the special figure high probability mode flag is on (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2002, and when the special figure high probability mode flag is off (step S2001: No), that is, the special figure In the special figure low probability mode in which the jackpot lottery is executed based on the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A), the process proceeds to step S2003.

<Steps S2002 and S2003>
In the special figure high probability mode (Step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the special figure high probability mode in the special figure execution area RAE of the special figure holding storage area 412b based on the special figure high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10B). It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the stored hit information as numerical information is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S2002). On the other hand, if the mode is the special figure low probability mode (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 determines the special figure execution area of the special figure reservation storage area 412b based on the special figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A). It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the RAE, is a value corresponding to the jackpot (step S2003).

<Step S2004>
In step S2004, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step S2002 or S2003 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot in the special figure execution area RAE. . The MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2005 if the result of the hit determination is a big hit (step S2004: Yes), and shifts the processing to step S2005 if the result of the hit / non-judgment is not a big hit (step S2004: No). The process moves to S2006.

<Step S2005>
If the result of the hit determination is a jackpot (step S2004: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag to ON (step S2005). The jackpot type flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and also indicates the type of the jackpot. That is, the MPU 51 sets the 4R normal jackpot flag indicating that there is a 4R normal jackpot, the 5R certain variable jackpot flag indicating that there is a 5R certain variable jackpot, or the 16R certain variable jackpot flag indicating that there is a 16R certain variable jackpot according to the type of the jackpot that has been won. Set one of them. The big hit type flag is referred to in step S2102 of the big hit game control process in FIG. 28 to set the number of round games in the open / close execution mode. Then, when the processing in step S2005 ends, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2012.

<Step S2006>
If the result of the hit / fail determination in step S2002 or S2003 is not a jackpot (step S2004: No), that is, if the result of the hit / fail determination is out of order, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is set to ON. A determination is made (step S2006). The high-frequency support mode flag is a high-frequency support mode in which the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 is supported by the high frequency operation of the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315. Is set to ON in step S2171 of the big hit game control process in FIG.

<Steps S2007 and S2008>
If the high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON (step S2006: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the support frequency counter set in step S2167 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 33 (step S2007). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the support frequency counter is 0, that is, whether or not to end the high frequency support mode (step S2008). When the value of the support number counter is 0 (step S2008: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2009, and when the value of the support number counter is not 0 (step S2008: No), shifts the processing to step S2012. I do.

<Step S2009>
In step S2009, when the value of the number-of-supports counter is 0 (step S2008: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the high-frequency support mode flag to off (step S2009). In other words, the MPU 51 ends the high-frequency support mode when the specified number of times of high-frequency support by the electric accessory 315b is executed, and the frequency of support of the game balls 99 to the second winning opening 315 by the electric auditors 315b is low. Shift to low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is ended at the start of the variable number of special symbol display, but the high-frequency support mode may be ended at the end of the variable number of special symbol display. .

<Step S2010>
In step S2010, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure high probability mode flag for executing the jackpot lottery is set to ON based on the special figure high probability mode success / failure table (FIG. 10B). When the special figure high probability mode flag is set to ON (step S2010: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2011, and when the special figure high probability mode flag is set to OFF (step S2011: No), the process moves to step S2012.

<Step S2011>
In step S2011, the MPU 41 sets the special figure high probability mode flag to off (step S2011). In other words, in the special figure high probability mode in which the jackpot lottery probability is high, the MPU 51 performs the special figure high probability mode when the support of the game ball 99 to the second winning opening 315 by the electric accessory 315b is performed a specified number of times with high frequency. To end and shift to the special map low probability mode in which the jackpot lottery probability is low.

<Step S2012>
In step S2012, the MPU 41, based on the hit / fail information stored in the special figure execution area RAE of the special figure holding storage area 412b, determines the fluctuation pattern including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special figure fluctuation and the special figure fluctuation pattern. The command is set in the RAM 412. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice ramp control device 5 displays a symbol based on the variation pattern command. The symbol variation display and the like by the unit 341 are executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is “4R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 assigns “A01” to “A01” to the variation patterns “01” to “03” that indicate “4R normal jackpot”. One of “A03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 selects any one of “B01” to “B03” in which the variation pattern “01” to “03” has “B” indicating that it is a 5R probable jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 selects any one of “C01” to “C03” in which the variation patterns “01” to “03” have “C” indicating that it is a 16R probable jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes any of “D01” to “D12” with “D” indicating that it is out of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “12”. It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is “missing”, the MPU 41 causes the variation pattern command to include information on any of the reach out of front and rear, the reach other than the front and back out, and complete out of reach.

<Step S2013>
In step S2013, the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display portion 372 or the second special symbol display portion 373 of the main display portion 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game. Set the special figure fluctuation time counter corresponding to the time. Specifically, when the result of the determination in step S2002 or S2003 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the 4R ordinary jackpot variation table. If the result of the determination in step S2002 or S2003 is a jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot variation table. Further, when the result of the determination of success or failure in step S2002 or S2003 is out of range, the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table.

<Steps S2014 and S2015>
In step S2014, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 372 or the second special symbol display unit 373, and further starts the change on the special symbol display units 372 and 373. When the special symbol change display is started, the special figure change display flag is set to ON (step S2015). The special-flag display flag is referred to in step S1802 in the variable game control process in FIG. 25, in order to determine whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in the special symbol display sections 372 and 373. In addition, when the special symbol display unit 372 or 373 starts the variable display of the special symbol, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” stored in the game information storage area 412 d set in the RAM 412. Further, if the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning is based on the low probability mode success / failure table in step S2003 is incorrect, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “number of consecutive misses” stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the success / failure results in a big hit. In some cases, the "number of consecutive misses" is cleared to zero.

[Big hit game control processing]
In the jackpot game control process, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the variable prize device 35 or the V prize device 36 is operated in accordance with the number of round games in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game, thereby achieving a variable prize. A process of allowing the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning opening 353 of the device 35 or the variable winning opening 363 or the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 is executed. In the big hit game control process, after the big hit game ends, a process for shifting to a high frequency support mode (ST game state or time-saving game state) is executed. Here, FIG. 28 to FIG. 33 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the big hit game control process. Hereinafter, the jackpot game control process will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the big hit game start flag set in step S1811 in the variable game control process in FIG. 25 is turned on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to start the big hit game. When the big hit game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2102, and when the big hit game start flag is set to OFF (step S2101: No), the process is performed. Shifts to step S2108 in FIG.

<Steps S2102 to S2107>
If the big hit game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the number of round games to be executed in the big hit game opening / closing execution mode in the round number counter. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter based on the jackpot type set to ON in step S2005 of the special figure change start process in FIG. For example, when the 4R normal big hit flag of the big hit type flags is set to ON, "4" is set as the value of the round number counter to execute four round games in the open / close execution mode. If the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON, "5" is set as the value of the round number counter. If the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON, the value of the round number counter is set to "5". 16 "is set. Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag referred to in Step S2101 to off (Step S2103). Further, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed to ON (step S2104), and notifies the audio ramp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started. Is set (step S2105). The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 41. In addition, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that it is the opening of the jackpot game to ON (step S2106), sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S2107), and ends the jackpot game. I do.

<Step S2108>
As shown in FIG. 29, when the jackpot game start flag is set to off (step S2101: No in FIG. 28), the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot game execution flag set to on in step S2104 in FIG. Is determined, that is, whether the jackpot game is being executed or not (step S2108). When the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2109, and when the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF (step S2108: No). Then, the jackpot game control process ends.

<Step S2109>
When the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON (step S2108: YES), the MPU 41 determines whether the opening flag set to ON in step S2106 in FIG. 28 is set to ON, that is, the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not the opening is being executed (step S2109). When the opening flag is set to on (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2110, and when the opening flag is set to off (step S2109: No), the MPU 41 executes the processing in FIG. The process moves to step S2118.

<Steps S2110 and S2111>
If the opening flag is set to ON (step S2109: YES), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter set in step S2107 in FIG. 28 (step S2110), and the opening time counter after the subtraction. Is determined to be 0, that is, whether the opening is completed and the open / close execution mode is started (step S2111). If the value of the opening time counter is 0 (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2112. If the value of the opening time counter is not 0 (step S2111: No), the MPU 41 executes the big hit game control processing. finish.

<Steps S2112 to S2917>
When the value of the opening time counter is 0 (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to OFF (step S2112), opens the variable winning door 352 of the variable winning device 35, and rounds the first round. The game is started (step S2113). This allows the game balls 99 to enter the variable winning opening 353, and provides an opportunity to acquire a large number of game balls 99. When the variable winning interval time indicating the remaining interval time between round games is 0 (Step S2138: Yes in FIG. 31), the MPU 41 determines that the value of the round number counter is not 1 (Step S1 in FIG. 31). S2139: No), that is, when starting a round game other than the first round game and the last round game, the variable winning door 352 of the variable winning device 35 is opened. Then, the MPU 41 sets the variable prize door opening flag indicating that the variable prize door 352 is open to the variable prize device 35 (step S2114), and the variable prize indicating the remaining opening time of the variable prize door 352. A door opening time counter is set (step S2115).

  Further, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command for notifying the sound ramp control device 5 that a round game in the opening / closing execution mode is started (step S2116), and sets the remaining round game set in step S2102 in FIG. One is subtracted from the value of the round number counter indicating the number (step S2117), and the jackpot game control ends. Note that the round game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S2118>
As shown in FIG. 30, when the opening flag is OFF (step S2109: NO in FIG. 29), the MPU 41 sets the variable winning door opening flag set ON in step S2114 in FIG. 29 to ON. It is determined whether or not the variable winning door 352 is open during the execution of the round game (step S2118). If the variable winning door opening flag is set to ON (step S2118: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2119, and if the variable winning door opening flag is set to OFF (step S2118: No), the process moves to step S2136 in FIG.

<Step S2119>
When the variable winning door opening flag is set to ON (step S2118: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first variable winning flag indicating that a winning has occurred in the variable winning opening 353 of the variable winning device 35 to ON. It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the variable winning opening 353 of the variable winning device 35 (step S2119). The first variable winning flag is set to ON when setting a winning ball command for winning in the variable winning opening 353, for example, in the winning ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When the first variable winning flag is set to ON (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2120, and when the first variable winning flag is set to OFF (step S2119: No). The process moves to step S2124.

<Steps S2120 and S2121>
When the first variable winning flag is set to ON (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the first variable winning counter indicating the number of winnings in the variable winning opening 353 (step S2120), and The variable winning flag is set to off (step S2121).

<Steps S2122 and S2123>
In step S2122, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the first variable winning counter added in step S2120 is 10. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to close the variable winning door 352 by entering the upper limit number of game balls 99. When the value of the first variable winning counter is 10 (Step S2122: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts the value of the variable winning door opening time counter and the value of the first variable winning counter to 0 (Step S2123), and executes the process. It moves to step S2126. On the other hand, when the value of the first variable winning counter is not 10 (Step S2122: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to Step S2124.

<Steps S2124 and S2125>
When the first variable winning flag is set to OFF (step S2119: No) or when the value of the first variable winning counter is not 10 (step S2122: No), the MPU 41 sets the value of the variable winning door opening time counter. Is subtracted by 1 (step S2124), and it is determined whether or not the value of the variable winning door opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2125). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to close the variable winning door 352 when the maximum opening time has been reached. If the value of the variable winning door opening time counter is 0 (step S2125: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2126, and if the value of the variable winning door opening time counter is not 0 (step S2125: No), the jackpot game The control processing ends.

<Steps S2126 and S2127>
When the value of the first variable winning counter is 10 (Step S2122: Yes), the process of Step S2123 is completed, or when the value of the variable winning door opening time counter is 0 (Step S2125: Yes), the MPU 41. Since it can be determined that it is time to close the variable winning door 352, the variable winning door 352 is closed to end the round game (step S2126), and the variable winning door opening flag is set to off (step S2127). .

<Steps S2128 and S2129>
In step S2128, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the round number counter set in step S2102 in FIG. 28 and subtracted in step S2117 in FIG. 29 at the start of the round game is 0 (step S2128). When the value of the round number counter is 0 (step S2128: Yes), that is, when there is no round game to be executed in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 41 sets an ending start flag for starting ending to on (step S2128). S2129), and ends the big hit game control process. That is, when the final round game in the open / close execution mode is ended by closing the variable winning door 352 of the variable winning device 35 in the 4R normal jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to start ending as shown in FIG. The ending start flag referred to in step S2162 is set to ON. On the other hand, when the value of the round number counter is not 0 (Step S2128: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to Step S2130.

<Steps S2130 and S2131>
If the value of the round number counter is not 0 (step S2128: No), the MPU 41 determines that the interval between the opening and closing operations of the variable winning door 352 (variable winning interval) is waiting for the opening of the variable winning door 352 (when the round game is open). Is set to ON (step S2130), and a variable winning interval time counter indicating the remaining time until the variable winning door 352 is opened is set (step S2131). .

<Step S2132>
In step S2132, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the round number counter set in step S2102 in FIG. 28 and decremented in step S2117 in FIG. 29 at the start of the round game is one. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the next round game executed after the variable winning interval is the last round game in the jackpot game. If the value of the round number counter is 1 (step S2132: Yes), that is, if the next round game to be executed after the variable winning interval is the last round game, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2133. On the other hand, when the value of the round number counter is not 1 (Step S2132: No), that is, when the next round game to be executed after the variable winning interval is not the last round game, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2133>
If the value of the round number counter is 1 (Step S2132: Yes), that is, if the next round game to be executed after the variable winning interval is the final round game, the MPU 41 determines that the big hit game is a probable variable big hit game (5R It is determined whether or not the game is a probability changing jackpot game or a 16R probability changing jackpot game (step S2133). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the next round game executed after the variable winning interval is a V winning round game. Here, the MPU 41 determines whether any one of the 5R probability variable big hit flag and the 16R big hit game flag among the big hit type flags set to on in step S2005 of the special figure change start process in FIG. 27 is set to on. It is determined that the game is a jackpot game. If the jackpot game is a probability variable jackpot game (step S2133: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2134, and if the jackpot game is not a probability variable jackpot game (if it is a 4R normal jackpot game) (step S2133) : No), the process moves to step S2135.

<Steps S2134 and S2135>
When the big hit game is the probability change big hit game (step S2133: Yes), a V winning round pre-round interval flag and a V winning round pre-game interval start command are set (step S2134). The pre-V winning round interval flag is a flag indicating that the round game to be executed next is a V winning round, and is used to determine whether or not to execute the V winning round in step S2139 of FIG. 31 described later. Referenced. Further, the V prize round pre-game interval start command is a command for notifying the audio ramp control device 5 that the next round game to be executed after the end of the variable prize interval is a V prize round game, and It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the process (see FIG. 20). As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 executes a variable winning request effect that requests the player to enter the gaming ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 on the symbol display unit 341 or the like (FIG. 45 (A)). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag when the probability change jackpot is set (Step S2133: Yes), when the V winning round pre-game interval start command is set (Step S2134), when the probability change jackpot is not (Step S2133: No). It is set to off (step S2135), and the big hit game control process ends.

<Step S2136>
As shown in FIG. 31, when the variable winning door opening flag is set to OFF (step S2118 in FIG. 30: No), the MPU 41 sets the variable winning interval flag set to ON in step S2130 in FIG. Is set to ON (step S2136). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable prize door 352 is closed and the variable prize door 352 is in an open standby state (a round game start standby state). When the flag during the variable winning interval is set to ON (step S2136: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2137, and when the flag during the variable winning interval is set to OFF (step S2136: No). Then, the process shifts to step S2146 in FIG.

<Steps S2137 and S2138>
If the variable winning interval flag is set to ON (step S2136: YES), the MPU 41 decrements the value of the variable winning interval time counter set in step S2131 of FIG. 30 by 1 (step S2137). It is determined whether or not the value of the variable winning interval time counter is 0, that is, whether it is time to open the variable winning door 352 (step S2138). When the variable winning interval time counter is 0 (step S2138: YES), the MPU 41 determines that it is the opening timing of the variable winning door 352, and shifts the processing to step S2139. On the other hand, when the variable winning interval time counter is not 0 (step S2138: No), the big hit game control process is ended.

<Step S2139>
When the variable winning interval time counter is 0 (step S2138: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning round pre-round interval flag set in step S2134 of FIG. 30 is turned on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the next round game executed after the variable winning interval is a V winning round game. The MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2140 when the pre-V winning round interval flag is on (step S2139: Yes), that is, when the next round game executed after the variable winning interval is the V winning round game. On the other hand, when the interval flag before V winning round is set to OFF (step S2139: No), that is, when the next round game executed after the variable winning interval is not the V winning round game, the MPU 41 executes the processing in FIG. Then, the process goes to step S2113 to execute the process of opening the variable winning door 352 of the variable winning device 35 described above (steps S2113 to 2117), and ends the big hit game control process.

<Steps S2100 to 2145>
When the interval flag before the V winning round is set to ON (step S2139: Yes), the MPU 41 controls the switching member 365 to the lower right by rotating the switching member 365 of the V winning device 36 clockwise. Then (step S2140), the V winning door 362 is opened (step S2141). As a result, the V winning round game is started, and the entering of the gaming ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 is permitted, while the entering of the gaming ball 99 into the variable winning opening 363 is restricted. (FIGS. 6 (B) to 6 (D)). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V winning door opening flag indicating that the V winning door 362 is open, that is, that the V round game is being executed, to ON (step S2142), and the remaining of the V winning door 362. A V winning door opening time counter indicating the opening time is set (step S2143).

  Further, the MPU 41 sets a V winning round game start command for notifying the sound ramp control device 5 that the V winning round game is started (Step S2144), and is set in Step S2102 of the jackpot game control process. One is subtracted from the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games (the round number counter is cleared) (step S2145), and the jackpot game control ends. Note that the V winning round game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 41.

<Step S2146>
As shown in FIG. 32, when the variable winning interval flag is set to OFF (Step S2136 in FIG. 31: No), the MPU 41 opens the V winning door 362 set to ON in Step S2142 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the V winning door opening flag indicating that the opening is being performed is set to ON (step S2146). When the V winning door opening flag is set to ON (step S2146: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2147, and when the V winning door opening flag is set to OFF (step S2146: No), the process proceeds to step S2162 in FIG.

<Step S2147>
If the V winning door opening flag is set to ON (step S2146: YES), the MPU 41 determines whether the V winning flag indicating that a winning has occurred in the V winning opening 364 is set to ON, that is, It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the V winning port 364 (step S2147). The V winning flag is set to ON when setting a winning ball command for winning in the V winning port 364, for example, in the winning ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main process of FIG. If the V winning flag is set to ON (step S2147: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2148, and if the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S2147: NO), the MPU 41 executes the processing. It moves to S2152.

<Steps S2148 and S2149>
If the V winning flag is set to ON (step S2147: YES), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to OFF (step S2148), and rotates the switching member 365 of the V winning device 36 in the counterclockwise direction. As a result, the switching member 365 is controlled to be lowered leftward (step S2149). This allows the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning opening 363 of the V winning device 36, while restricting the game ball 99 from entering the V winning opening 364 (FIG. 7A to FIG. 7A). FIG. 7 (C)).

<Steps S2150 and S2151>
In step S2150, the MPU 41 sets a V winning command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the gaming ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 in the V winning round game (step S2150). Then, the special figure high probability mode flag is set to ON (step S2151).

  Here, the V winning command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 and the like to execute a V winning prize presentation effect that clearly indicates to the player that the gaming ball 99 has entered the V prize opening 364 (see FIG. 45B). ).

  In addition, the special figure high probability mode flag is used to shift to the special figure high probability mode in which the big hit lottery is executed based on the special figure high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10B) after the end of the big hit game. Flag. The special figure high probability mode flag is used to determine whether or not the special figure high probability mode is set, for example, in step S1202 of the first special figure suspension command setting processing in FIG. 19 or in step S2001 in the special figure change start processing in FIG. Referenced in step S2010.

<Steps S2152 and S2153>
If the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S2147: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second variable winning flag indicating that a winning has occurred in the variable winning opening 363 of the V winning device 36 is set to ON. It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the variable winning opening 363 (step S2152). The second variable winning flag is set to ON when setting a winning ball command for winning in the variable winning opening 363, for example, in the winning ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When the second variable winning flag is set to ON (step S2152: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2153, and when the second variable winning flag is set to OFF (step S2152: No). Then, the process shifts to step S2157.

<Steps S2154 and S2155>
When the V winning flag is set to ON (step S2147: YES), the processing of steps S2148 to S2151 is executed, or when the second variable winning flag is set to ON (step S2152: Yes). When the process of step S2153 is performed, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the second variable prize counter (step S2154), and determines whether the value of the second variable prize counter after the addition is 10 (step S2154). S2155). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to close the V winning door 362 of the V winning device 36 based on the entry of the game balls 99 into the specified number of V winning ports 364 and the variable winning ports 363. When the value of the second variable prize counter after addition is 10 (step S2155: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2156, and when the value of the second variable prize counter after addition is not 10 (step S2155). : No), the process moves to step S2157.

<Step S2156>
When the value of the second variable winning counter after the addition is 10 (step S2155: Yes), the MPU 41 decrements the value of the second variable winning counter and the value of the V winning door opening time counter to 0 (step S2156). ).

<Steps S2157 and S2158>
If both the V winning flag and the second variable winning flag are off (NO in steps S2147 and S2152), or if the value of the second variable winning counter is not 10 (step S2155: No), the V winning door opening time The value of the counter is decremented by 1 (step S2157), and based on whether or not the value of the V winning door opening time counter after the subtraction is 0, that is, based on the elapse of the specified time, the V winning door 362 of the V winning device 36 is closed. It is determined whether or not to perform (step S2158). When the value of the V winning door opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2158: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2159, and when the value of the V winning door opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 ( Step S2158: Yes), ends the big hit game control process.

<Steps S2159 to S2161>
When the value of the second variable winning counter is 10 (Step S2155: Yes), the process of Step S2156 is executed, or when the value of the V winning door opening time counter is 0 (Step S2158: Yes), the MPU 41. Closes the V winning door 362 of the V winning device 36 (step S2159) and sets the V winning door opening flag to OFF (step S2160). Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending start flag for starting the ending of the big hit game to ON (step S2161), and ends the big hit game control processing. That is, the MPU 41 ends the V winning prize round game, which is the last round game in the open / close execution mode, in the probability changing jackpot game (5R probability changing jackpot game or 16R probability changing jackpot game) by closing the V winning door 362 of the V winning device 36. The ending start flag referred to in step S2162 of FIG. 33 is set to ON to determine whether to start ending.

<Step S2162>
As shown in FIG. 33, when the V winning door opening flag is set to OFF (Step S2146 in FIG. 32: No), the ending start that is set to ON in Step S2129 in FIG. 30 or Step S2161 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the flag is set to ON, that is, whether or not it is time to start ending in the big hit game (step S2162). When the ending start flag is set to ON (step S2162: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2163. When the ending start flag is set to OFF (step S2162: No), the MPU 41 executes the processing. The process moves to S2167.

<Steps S2163 to S2166>
If the ending start flag is set to ON (step S2162: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is in progress to ON (step S2163), and the ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending. Is set (step S2164). Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command for notifying the sound ramp control device 5 that ending is started (step S2165), sets an ending start flag to off (step S2166), and performs the big hit game control process. To end. The ending start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 and the like to start an ending effect.

<Step S2167>
When the ending start flag is set to off (step S2162: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending flag set to on in step S2163 is set to on, that is, the ending is performed in the big hit game. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S2167). When the ending flag is set to ON (step S2167: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2168, and when the ending flag is set to OFF (step S2167: No), the big hit game The control processing ends.

<Steps S2168 and S2169>
If the ending flag is set to ON (step S2167: YES), the MPU 41 subtracts one from the value of the ending time counter set in step S2164 (step S2168), and the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether it is 0, that is, whether it is the end timing of the ending (big hit game) (step S2169). When the value of the ending time counter is 0 (Step S2169: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to Step S2170. When the value of the ending time counter is not 0 (Step S2169: No), the MPU 41 executes the big hit game control processing. finish.

<Step S2170>
If the value of the ending time counter is 0 (step S2169: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is the end timing of the ending (big hit game), and thus sets the ending flag set to on in step S2163 to off. (Step S2170).

<Steps S2171 and S2172>
In step S2171, the MPU 41 sets the high frequency support mode flag to ON, and sets a support frequency counter (step S2172).

  Here, the high-frequency support mode flag is a flag indicating that the current mode is the high-frequency support mode (ST-variable game state or time-saving game state). The high frequency support mode flag executes the lottery per general figure based on either the general figure low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 12D) or the general figure high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 12E). In order to determine whether or not to do this, for example, it is referred to in step S1601 of the general-purpose change start process in FIG.

  Further, the support number counter indicates the maximum number of variable games executed in the high frequency support mode (ST-variable game state or time-saving game state). This support number counter is decremented each time a variable game is executed (step S2007 of the special figure change start process in FIG. 27). When the support frequency counter becomes 0, the high frequency support mode flag is set to off (step S2009 of the special figure change start process in FIG. 27), and the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. That is, when the support number counter becomes 0, the game mode shifts from the ST-variable game state or the time-saving game state to the normal game state (the special figure low probability mode and the low frequency support mode).

<Steps S2173 and S2174>
In step S2173, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command for notifying the audio ramp control device 5 of the end of the jackpot game, and turns off the jackpot game execution flag set on in step S2104 of FIG. This is set (step S2174), and the big hit game control process ends. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 and the like to start an ending effect.

[Game setting value change processing]
In the game setting value changing process, a process of controlling display or non-display of the game setting value or changing of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed in accordance with an operation on the setting value changing operation unit 46. . Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the technique setting value changing process. Hereinafter, the game setting value change processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 34, in step S2201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is being changed and displayed, and if the special symbol is being changed and displayed. (Step S2201: Yes), the game setting value change processing ends, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (Step S2201: No), the processing is shifted to Step S2202. Whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is determined based on, for example, a special figure variable display flag that is set to ON in step S2015 in the special figure variation starting process in FIG.

<Step S2202>
If the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S2201: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being executed (step S2202), and if the jackpot game is being executed (step S2202: Yes). When the game setting value changing process is finished and the big hit game is not being executed (Step S2202: No), the process is shifted to Step S2203. Whether or not the game is in the jackpot game state is determined based on the jackpot game execution flag set to ON in step S2104 of the jackpot game control process in FIG.

<Step S2203>
If the special symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner (Step S2201: No) and the jackpot game is not being executed (Step S2202: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game setting value display section 45 has been switched from off to on. (Step S2203), that is, it is determined whether or not an operation of turning on the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. That is, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S2201: Yes) or when the jackpot game is being executed (step S2202: Yes), the game set value is not displayed, and the game set value is not displayed. Cannot be changed. Here, when the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2204, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is turned on from off. If it has not been switched to (step S2203: No), the process moves to step S2207.

<Steps S2204 to S2206>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S2210 described later (step S2210). In step S2204, the game setting value display unit 45 displays the number indicating the read game setting value (step S2205). Thereby, the current game setting value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the set value display flag indicating that the game set value is displayed on the game set value display section 45 (step S2206), and ends the game set value changing process.

<Step S2207>
If the power of the game setting value display section 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S2203: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the setting value displaying flag is set to on (step S2207). The set value displaying flag indicates that the game set value is displayed on the game set value display section 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S2206. When the setting value displaying flag is set to ON (step S2207: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2208, and when the setting value displaying flag is set to OFF (step S2207: No). In other words, when the game setting value display section 45 is turned off and the power is not turned on, the game setting value change processing ends.

<Step S2208>
If the set value display flag is set to ON (step S2207: YES), the MPU 41 determines whether the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2208). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game setting value has been performed. When the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S2208: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2209, and when the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S2208: No), The process moves to step S2211.

<Step S2209>
When the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2208: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S2209). For example, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one larger than the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before the rotation, and Conversely, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, a number smaller than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 is displayed before the rotation.

  When the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 before the rotation is “6”, when the setting value change operation section 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the game setting value display section 45 is displayed. When the displayed number is changed to "1" and the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 is "1" before rotation, the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle. In this case, the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 is changed to “6”. Further, when the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 is “6”, it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 is “1”. In the case of, it may not be rotated further to the left.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 41 overwrites and saves the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 as the game setting value in the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and ends the game setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the set value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally set as a valid game setting value in the RAM 412. It is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. Then, the game set value can be determined by turning off the power of the game set value display section 45 while the number corresponding to the target game set value is displayed on the game set value display section 45.

<Step S2211>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S2208: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S2211), that is, the setting value. It is determined whether or not an operation of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the change operation unit 46. When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2212, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off. If not (step S2211: No), the game setting value change processing ends. When the power of the game setting value display section 45 is switched from on to off (step S2211: Yes), the game setting value display section 45 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment display, thereby turning off the game setting value. Is turned off, and the game setting value is determined as described above.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (Step S2211: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the special figure is low according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in Step S2210. The probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 10A) is selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S2212). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to off (step S2213), and ends the game setting value change processing.

[Specific performance information update processing]
In the specific performance information update process, at least the base information is updated as the specific performance information, and the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like are updated as necessary. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of the base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. Hereinafter, the specific performance information update processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

<Steps S2301 and S2302>
As shown in FIG. 35, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out-balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2301), and the number of out-balls reaches 60,000. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S2302). When the number of out-balls has reached 60,000 (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2305, and when the number of out-balls has not reached 60,000 (step S2302: No), the processing proceeds to step S2305. The process moves to S2303.

<Steps S2303 and S2304>
If the number of out-balls has not reached 60,000 (step S2302: No), the MPU 51 reads out the number of general pay-out payout balls and the number of first pay-out payout balls for the base calculation of the base information (step S2303). Then, the MPU 51 determines the number of outgoing balls for base calculation of the base information read in step S2301, the number of general payout opening payout balls and the number of first winning opening payout balls for base calculation of the base information read in step S2303. Based on this, the current base BL is calculated, and the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is overwritten and updated (step S2304) (see FIG. 36A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (the number of general winning opening payout balls + the number of first winning opening payout balls) / the number of outgoing balls.

<Steps S2305 to S2308>
If the number of out-balls has reached 60000 (Step S2302: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (Steps S2305 to S2307). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the 60,000-ball base twice before in the base information (step S2305). The BL is shifted to the previous 60,000-ball base B1 (step S2306), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S2307). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of general winning opening payout balls, the number of first winning opening payout balls, and the number of outgoing balls for base calculation stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S2308). ).

<Step S2309>
When the processing of step S2304 or S2308 is completed, the MPU 51 reads out various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performance, and updates the other specific performance information to the calculated value (step S2309). ), And ends the specific performance information update processing. In this case, the specific performance is, for example, the number of lotteries per unit big hit, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in the specific performance information update process on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Here, FIGS. 37 to 40 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43. Hereinafter, the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Step S2401>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S2406 described later or step S2430 in FIG. If the BL display flag is set to on (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2408 in FIG. 38, and if the BL display flag is set to off (step S2401: No) ) And the process moves to step S2402.

<Step S2402>
If the BL display flag is set to off (step S2401: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to on (step S2402). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the last 60,000-ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S2412 of FIG. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2402: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2417 in FIG. 39, and if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S2402: No) ) And the process moves to step S2403.

<Step S2403>
If the B1 display flag is set to off (step S2402: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 display flag is set to on (step S2403). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 is displayed two times before on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S2421 in FIG. 39 described later. When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2403: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2426 in FIG. 40, and when the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S2403: No) ) And the process moves to step S2404.

<Step S2404>
If the B2 display-in-progress flag is set to off (step S2403: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S2404). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S2404: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2405, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S2404: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends.

<Steps S2405 to S2407>
When the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S2405). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 36A, “8.”, “L”, and “L” indicating that the current base BL is 29% "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. When the base information is an example shown in FIG. 36B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S2406), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a fixed time (step S2407), and performs the display control process. To end.

<Steps S2408 and S2409>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2401: Yes), as shown in FIG. 38, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S2407 of FIG. 37 (step S2401). In step S2409, it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2409). When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2410, and when the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2409: No) ) And the process moves to step S2414.

<Steps S2410 to S2413>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S2410), and stores the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The last 60,000-ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2411). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 36A, "8." and "1" indicating that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 33%. , "3", and "3" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “1”, “2”, and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S2412), and sets a B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000-ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2413). The display control processing ends.

<Step S2414>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2409: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2414). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2414: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2415, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2414: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends. When the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2414: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 to indicate the current base BL. And the number are turned off.

<Steps S2415 and S2416>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2414: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S2415), and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S2415). S2416), the display control process ends.

<Steps S2417 and S2418>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2402: YES), as shown in FIG. 39, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S2413 of FIG. S2417), it is determined whether or not the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2418). When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2418: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2419, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2418: No) ) And the process moves to step S2423.

<Steps S2419 to S2422>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2418: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S2419), and stores the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The 60,000-ball base B2 included two times before in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2420). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 36A, "8.", "2." , "3" and "2" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S2421), and sets a B2 display time counter corresponding to a certain time for displaying the 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S2422). Then, the display control process ends.

<Step S2423>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2418: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2423). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2423: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2424, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2423: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends. When the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2423: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and thus the previous 60,000-ball base B1 Are turned off.

<Steps S2424 and S2425>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2423: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S2424), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S2424). S2425), the display control process ends.

<Steps S2426 and S2427>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2403: YES), as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 41 decrements the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S2422 of FIG. (S2426), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2427). When the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2427: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2428, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2427: No) ) And the process moves to step S2432.

<Steps S2428 to S2431>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2427: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S2428), and stores the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current status BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2429). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 36A, “8.”, “L”, and “L” indicating that the current base BL is 29% "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. When the base information is an example shown in FIG. 36B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S2430), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2431), and performs the display control process. To end.

<Step S2432>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2427: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2432). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2432: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2433, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2432: No), the process proceeds. The display control processing ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2432: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 is used two times before. Are turned off.

<Steps S2433 and S2434>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2432: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S2433), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S2433). S2434), the display control process ends.

[Process of Voice Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, a process executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Note that another or another embodiment in which part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 is also considered. Further, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes a control process of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, a start-up process when the audio lamp control device 5 starts up, an NMI interrupt process in the case of a power failure, and the like. A description of those processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the sub-timer interruption process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a cycle of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the sub timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 updates the counter (step S2501), the command determination process (step S2502), the variable game effect process (step S2503), and the big hit game effect process (step S2504). ).

[Counter update processing]
In the counter updating process (step S2501), the MPU 51 updates the values of counters such as the first stopped symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, and the variation display counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol counter and the effect pattern type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stopped symbol counter updated here is used to determine the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 4. For example, the effect pattern type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 149. On the other hand, the MPU 51 decrements the variable display counter by one. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341. The counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Is set. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is being changed, that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 has been completed, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2502), a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the command determination process.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 42, in step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (Step S2601: Yes), the processing shifts to Step S2602. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (Step S2601: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination processing. The command received from main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in step S2601, and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when the command has been processed. For example, the command is stored in the processing work storage area. It is memorized.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command. Here, if the received command is a special figure change pattern command (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2603, and if the received command is not a special figure change pattern command (step S2602: No). The process moves to step S2606.

<Step S2603>
In step S <b> 2603, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (combination of stop symbols and effect types (effect patterns) for decoration symbols) based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 checks the special variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 43 (A)), the variation type table (see FIG. 43 (B)) and the effect pattern type which are stored in the ROM 511 in advance. The variation pattern is determined based on the selection table (see FIGS. 44A to 44C) and the values of the first stop symbol counter and the effect pattern type counter stored in the RAM 512. Further, when the special figure variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type as in the present embodiment, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 4R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot, sets the 5R certain jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R positive variable jackpot, Is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed last. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is determined. FIG. 43 (A) shows a symbol combination in which the decorative symbols are “1” to “9”, and “333” is a probable jackpot (either a 5R probable jackpot or a 16R probable jackpot); Is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and that the symbol combination other than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination that indicates either a 4R regular jackpot, a 5R variable jackpot, or a 16R variable jackpot. It is assumed.

  When the lottery result is "4R normal big hit", there is no sorting of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is “4R regular jackpot”, the symbol combination of “333” or “777” indicating the 5R probability change jackpot or the 16R probability change jackpot (probability change jackpot) is not stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination is “333”. And the numbers other than "777" are stopped and displayed.

  Also, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, “7” is not assigned as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined at a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than “7”. That is, when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, the symbol combination of “777” indicating the 16R probability change hit is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of “333” indicating the 5R probability change jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination of “333” indicating that the decorative symbol stop display result indicates the 4R normal jackpot can be stopped and displayed. If the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot” and if a decorative symbol other than “3” other than “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 determines that the 5R probable jackpot is a jackpot game. The specified 5R probability change promotion effect is executed.

  Further, when the lottery result is “16 probable jackpot”, there is a distribution to all the decorative symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop is performed at a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols “1” to “9”. The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of “777” indicating the 16R probability change jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is "16R probable jackpot", the symbol display combination display other than the "777" symbol combination indicating that the decorative symbol stop display result indicates the 5R probable jackpot or the 4R regular jackpot is stopped and displayed. Can be done. Then, when the lottery result is “16R probable big hit” and “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that the 16R probable big hit is a big hit game.

  Then, when determining the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. Thereby, the stop symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated line of the symbol display unit 341 in the variable game is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is "out", there is a distribution for all the decorative symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols "1" to "9". Is done. Then, when the lottery result is "missing" and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol, and sets the out-of-change variation table (FIG. 12 (A) to 12 (C)), and determines the second stop symbol based on the departure type selected based on the first stop symbol determined previously. For example, in the case where the out-of-off type is out-of-reach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the disengagement type is reach other than the disengagement, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. The pattern is determined. In addition, when the departure type is completely departed, the second stop symbol is determined to be different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined irrespective of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 43B is a diagram illustrating an example of the change type table. As shown in FIG. 43B, in the variation type table, the content of the variation display time and variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command are defined.

  For example, when the lottery result is “4R normal big hit”, the fluctuation pattern command “A01” having the fluctuation pattern “01” is associated with the fluctuation display time “30 s” and the fluctuation type “Normal reach X effect pattern”, The fluctuation pattern command “A02” having the fluctuation pattern “02” is associated with the fluctuation display time “60 s” and the fluctuation type “Super Reach Y effect pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern command “A03” having the fluctuation pattern “03”. Are associated with the fluctuation display time “90 s” and the fluctuation type “special reach Z effect pattern”.

  Also, when the lottery result is “5R probable big hit”, the fluctuation pattern command “B01” whose fluctuation pattern is “01” is associated with the fluctuation display time “30 s” and the fluctuation type “Normal reach X effect pattern”, The fluctuation pattern command “B02” having the fluctuation pattern “02” is associated with the fluctuation display time “60 s” and the fluctuation type “Super Reach Y effect pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern command “B03” having the fluctuation pattern “03”. Are associated with the fluctuation display time “90 s” and the fluctuation type “special reach Z effect pattern”.

  Also, when the lottery result is “16R probable big hit”, the fluctuation pattern command “C01” whose fluctuation pattern is “01” is associated with the fluctuation display time “30 s” and the fluctuation type “Normal reach X effect pattern”, The fluctuation pattern command “C02” having the fluctuation pattern “02” is associated with the fluctuation display time “60 s” and the fluctuation type “Super Reach Y effect pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern command “C03” having the fluctuation pattern “03”. Are associated with the fluctuation display time “90 s” and the fluctuation type “special reach Z effect pattern”.

  Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the fluctuation pattern command “D01” in which the fluctuation pattern is “01” is associated with the fluctuation display time “30 s” and the fluctuation type “Normal reach X effect pattern”. Is associated with the fluctuation display time “60 s” and the fluctuation type “Super Reach Y effect pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern command “D03” whose fluctuation pattern is “03”. Is associated with the fluctuation display time “90s” and the fluctuation type “Special Reach Z production pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern command “D04” having the fluctuation pattern “04” has the fluctuation display time “7s” and the fluctuation type “non-reach”. C effect pattern ”, and the fluctuation pattern command“ D05 ”whose fluctuation pattern is“ 05 ” Is associated with the fluctuation display time “10 s” and the fluctuation type “non-reach D effect pattern”. The fluctuation pattern command “D06” having the fluctuation pattern “06” has the fluctuation display time “20 s” and the fluctuation type “normal reach B”. The fluctuation pattern command “D07” having the fluctuation pattern “07” is associated with the fluctuation display time “40 s” and the fluctuation type “Super Reach B effect pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern is “08”. Is associated with the fluctuation display time “4 s” and the fluctuation type “non-reach B effect pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern command “D09” whose fluctuation pattern is “09” is displayed with fluctuation. The time “15 s” and the variation type “normal reach A effect pattern” are associated with each other, and the variation pattern is “1”. Is associated with the fluctuation display time “25 s” and the fluctuation type “normal reach C effect pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern command “D11” whose fluctuation pattern is “11” is displayed with the fluctuation display time. "35s" and the variation type "Super Reach A production pattern" are associated with each other, and the variation pattern command "D12" whose variation pattern is "12" has the variation display time "2s" and the variation type "Non-reach A production pattern". Are associated with each other.

  Here, FIGS. 44A to 44C are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect pattern type selection table.

  Each effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 44A is a normal reach X effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual variable game effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach X effect, and FIG. 44B is a variable game effect. FIG. 44C is a super reach Y effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual variable game effect type in the effect is the super reach Y effect, and FIG. 44C shows the final individual variable game effect type in the variable game effect. It is a special reach Z effect pattern type selection table referred to when it is a special reach Z effect.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example where there are five effect types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more effect types. In addition, in FIGS. 44 (A) to 44 (C), the normal reach A effect in which the final individual variable game effect types are the normal reach A effect, the normal reach B effect, the normal reach C effect, the super reach A effect, and the super reach B effect. The pattern type selection table, the normal reach B effect pattern type selection table, the normal reach C effect pattern type selection table, the super reach A effect pattern type selection table, and the super reach B effect pattern type selection table for super reach B are omitted. Further, in FIGS. 44A to 44C, non-reach A effect pattern type selection tables, non-reach B effect pattern type selection tables, non-reach C effect pattern type selection tables for non-reach A to D, The reach D effect pattern type selection table is also omitted.

  In the normal reach X effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 44 (A), the effect pattern corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result (4R normal hit, 5R certain change hit, 16R certain change hit, and out). “Effect pattern X1” to “effect pattern X5” are defined as types. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach X effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result and selects the normal reach X effect pattern type. Choose from a table. Here, the effect pattern X1 to the effect pattern X5 included in the normal reach X effect pattern type selection table are, for example, an effect in which a normal reach X effect in which the decorative symbol is in the reach state after the high-speed fluctuating effect in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed is executed. And the final individual variable game production type is a production in which the normal reach X production is performed.

  In the super-reach Y effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 44B, “effect pattern Y1” to “effect pattern Y5” are set as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Stipulated. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a super reach Y effect pattern, the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter in accordance with the lottery result. Select from the type selection table. Here, for the effect pattern Y1 to effect pattern Y5 included in the super reach Y effect pattern type selection table, for example, a normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed variable effect, and the final individual variable game effect type is a bigger hit than the normal reach effect. This is a production that has a high degree of expectation and develops into a Super Reach Y production that has a longer production execution time than a normal reach production. The super reach Y effect pattern type selection table may include a super reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super reach Y effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect without passing through the normal reach effect.

  Further, in the special reach Z effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 44C, “effect pattern Z1” to “effect pattern Z5” are displayed as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Stipulated. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach Z effect pattern, the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from the type selection table. Here, as for the effect patterns Z1 to Z5 included in the special reach Z effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the end of the high-speed variable effect, and the normal reach as the final individual variable game effect type. This is a production that has a higher jackpot expectation than the production and super-reach production, and develops into a special reach Z production that has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. Note that the special reach Z effect pattern type selection table is a special reach effect pattern that evolves into a special reach Z effect without passing through at least one of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect, and after the end of the high speed fluctuation effect or the normal reach effect. May be included.

  Then, the MPU 51 displays the special symbol variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect pattern type table and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol determined based on the effect pattern type counter, and the display variation pattern indicating the variation type (effect pattern type). The command is set in the RAM 512.

<Step S2604>
Returning to the description of FIG. 42, in step S2604, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the special figure variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the special figure fluctuation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter updating process of step S2501 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 41, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display based on the variable display counter. , The remaining time of the variable display time can be determined. For example, when the variable display counter becomes 0, the MPU 51 can determine that the variable display of the special symbol has ended.

<Step S2605>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the combination of the stop symbol of the decoration symbol in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type). The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decoration symbol determined in step S2603 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, in the ROM 611 of the display control device 6, a variation image of a decorative symbol, an effect image, and the like corresponding to each display variation pattern command are stored. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the combination of the stop symbol of the decoration symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until a predetermined variable display time elapses, and The change of the decoration design is stopped and displayed in order. During the variation display of the decorative symbol, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. .

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The big hit game start command is a command indicating that a big hit game is started, and is set when a big hit game is started in the big hit game control processing of FIG. 28 (step S2106). Here, when the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2607, and when the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2606: No), the processing is performed. Shifts to step S2608.

<Step S2607>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON (step S2607). The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting a jackpot game effect (opening effect), and determines whether or not to determine and execute the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Is referred to when judging.

<Step S2608>
In step S2608, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating that a round game in the open / close execution mode is to be started, and is set when a round game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 (step S2116). Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2608: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2609, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2608: No), the processing proceeds. Is shifted to step S2610.

<Step S2609>
When the round game start command is received (Step S2608: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (Step S2609). The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start a round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a pre-V winning round pre-game interval start command. The V prize round pre-game interval start command is a command for notifying the audio ramp control device 5 that the interval between round games immediately before the V prize round game in the probable variable jackpot game is started is started. It is set in step S2134 in the jackpot game control process. Here, when the received command is the V winning round pre-game interval start command (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2611, and when the received command is not the V winning round pre-game interval start command. (Step S2610: No), the process moves to step S2612.

<Step S2611>
When the V prize round pre-game interval start command is received (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a variable prize request effect start flag for starting a variable prize request effect (see FIG. 45A) described later to be on. (Step S2611). The variable winning request effect start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the variable winning request effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

  Here, FIG. 45A is an example of a display screen of the symbol display unit 341 showing an example of a variable winning request effect effect. As shown in FIG. 45 (A), the variable winning request effect is an effect that requests the player to enter the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36. More specifically, in the variable prize request effect, the symbol display unit 341 displays an image indicating right-handing (a plurality of “→” images and “right-handed” character images), and an image imitating the V-winning device 36. In addition, an image in which the game ball 99 advances toward the V winning device 36, and a character image prompting a V winning by right-handing (a character image of “Aim for V winning by right-handing!”) Are displayed. Note that the variable prize request effect is started at the start of the interval between round games before the V prize round game in the 5R probability changing big hit game and the 16R probability changing big hit game is started. In addition, the variable winning request effect is produced when the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 in the V winning round game or when the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning opening 364. The game is ended when the winning round game is ended.

<Step S2612>
Referring back to FIG. 42, in step S2612, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a V winning command. 32. This is a command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 in the V winning round game in the probability changing jackpot game. Is set in step S2144 of FIG. Here, if the received command is a V winning command (step S2612: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2613. If the received command is not a V winning command (step S2612: NO), the MPU 51 executes the processing. The process moves to S2614.

<Step S2613>
If a V winning command has been received (step S2612: YES), the MPU 51 sets a V winning flag to ON (step S2613). The V winning flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the V winning explicit effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 41.

  Here, FIG. 45 (B) is an example of a display screen of the symbol display unit 341 showing an example of the V winning clarification effect. As shown in FIG. 45 (B), the V winning prize presentation effect is an effect that clearly indicates to the player that the game ball 99 has entered the V prize opening 364 of the V prize device 36. Specifically, in the V winning prize presentation effect, a character image (character image of “V prize”) that clearly indicates that the game ball 99 has entered the V prize opening 364 is displayed on the symbol display section 341, After the end, a character image (character image of “Rush determined”) is displayed, which clearly indicates that the game mode is to be shifted to the ST-probable game state (special figure high probability mode and high frequency support mode). Also, in the V winning prize presentation effect, a notification sound indicating that the gaming ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 364 is output from the speaker 26, and the gaming ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 364 in the illumination unit 27. (For example, a rainbow lamp effect using a plurality of lamps) may be executed. The V-win prize presentation effect is started when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V-win prize opening 364, and is ended when the V-win prize round game is ended. Also, when the gaming ball 99 is not inserted into the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game, the V winning explicit effect is not executed, and the variable winning request effect is performed until the V winning round game ends (FIG. 45 (A)). Reference) is performed.

<Step S2614>
Referring back to FIG. 42, in step S2614, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating that the ending in the big hit game is started, and is set when starting the ending in the big hit game control process of FIG. 33 (step S2165). Here, when the received command is the ending start command (step S2614: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2615, and when the received command is not the ending start command (step S2614: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. The process moves to S2616.

<Step S2615>
If an ending start command has been received (step S2614: YES), the MPU 51 sets an ending start effect flag to ON (step S2615). The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

  Here, FIG. 45 (C) and FIG. 45 (D) are examples of the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 in the ending effect in the probability-change big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (C), when the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game, an ST transition ending effect is executed as the ending effect. In the ST shift ending effect, the symbol display section 341 displays a character image (“Rush rush” of “Rush rush”) indicating that the game is to be shifted to the ST sure change game state (special figure high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the certain probability big hit game. Along with the character image), a character image (character image of “ST90 times”) indicating the maximum number of variable games executed in the ST-variable game state is displayed. In other words, in the probability change jackpot game, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game, the symbol display section is displayed from the start of the interval between round games before the start of the V winning round game to the ending. At 341, the images are displayed in the order of FIG. 45 (A) (image effect of variable winning request effect) → FIG. 45 (B) (image effect of V winning clear effect) → FIG. 45 (C) (ST transition ending effect image effect). The screen is shifted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (D), when the gaming ball 99 is not inserted into the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game, a time-saving transition ending effect is executed as the ending effect. In the time saving shift ending effect, the symbol display section 341 displays a character image indicating that the game is to be shifted to the time saving game state (the special figure low probability mode and the high frequency support mode) after the end of the probability change jackpot game. Along with the character image), a character image (a character image of “90 time reductions”) indicating the maximum number of variable games executed in the time saving game state is displayed. That is, in the probability changing jackpot game, when the game ball 99 is not inserted into the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game, the symbol display section 341 is displayed from the start of the interval between round games before the start of the V winning round game to the ending. Then, the display screen is shifted in the order of FIG. 45 (A) (image effect of variable winning request effect) → FIG. 45 (D) (image effect of time saving shift ending effect).

  In the 4R jackpot game, the variable winning request effect (see FIG. 45 (A)) and the V-win winning effect (see FIG. 45 (B)) are not executed. As in the case where the gaming ball 99 is not inserted into the V winning opening 364 in the winning round game, a time-saving shift ending effect is executed (see FIG. 45 (D)).

<Step S2616>
Referring back to FIG. 42, in step S2616, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The big hit game end command is a command for ending the big hit game, and is set when the big hit game is ended in the big hit game control processing of FIG. 33 (step S2173). Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2616: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2617, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2616: No), the process Is shifted to step S2618.

<Step S2617>
When the jackpot game end command is received (step S2616: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON (step S2617). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and determines whether to end the ending effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. Referred to when.

<Step S2618>
In step S2618, the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process.

[Variable game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 41, in the variable game effect process (step S2003), when the variable game is executed, the MPU 51 outputs a sound output effect in the variable game effect determined in step S2603 of the command determination process of FIG. And the lamp effect is executed by the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27. In the variable game effect process, when the player performs an operation on the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation period in the variable game in order to execute the operation button effect, the image effect of the operation button effect is displayed as a symbol. An operation button effect execution command to be executed by the unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6, and a sound output effect of the operation button effect is executed by the speaker 26, and a lamp effect of the operation button effect is executed by the illumination unit 27.

[Big hit game production process]
In the jackpot game effect process (step S2004), a jackpot game effect to be performed in the jackpot game is determined, and the symbol jackpot game effect is executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like. First, in the jackpot game effect process, when a jackpot game start command is received (when the jackpot game effect start flag is set to ON), the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, and the ending effect are determined as the jackpot game effect. , An opening effect is performed. In addition, in the jackpot game effect process, when a round game start command is received (when the round game effect start flag is set to ON), a round game effect corresponding to each round game is executed as an opening / closing execution mode effect. . Also, in the big hit game rendering process, when a V winning round pre-game interval start command is received (when the variable winning request rendering start flag is set to ON), a variable winning request rendering is performed as an opening / closing execution mode rendering. . In the big hit game rendering process, when a V winning command is received (when the V winning flag is set to ON), a V winning explicit rendering is executed as the opening / closing execution mode rendering. In the jackpot game effect process, when an ending start command is received (when the ending effect start flag is set to ON), an ST transition ending effect (see FIG. 45 (C)) or a time reduction ending effect (FIG. 45) (Refer to (D)). In the big hit game effect process, when the big hit end command is received (when the big hit game effect end flag is set to ON), the ending effect is ended.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the V-winning round game of the probability variable jackpot game, the V-winning punk is generated without intentionally causing the gaming ball 99 to enter the V-winning opening 364, After the probable jackpot game is over, the game can be shifted to the time saving game state instead of the ST probable game state. Therefore, the player intentionally causes the V winning prize puncture in the V winning round game, so that even if the jackpot is a variable jackpot, the digestion time of the variable game when the lottery result is out of the jackpot lottery is changed to the ST certain variable gaming state. It is possible to select to shift to a shorter time-saving gaming state at will. Thus, the player can use the high-frequency support mode in a short time even in a situation where the game time is limited by selecting the time-saving game state by his / her own intention.

  In the gaming machine 10, the big hit expectation in the high frequency support mode does not greatly differ between the time-saving gaming state and the ST-probable gaming state. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot expectation degree in the ST-probable game state is 63.42% common to all game setting values, whereas the jackpot expectation degree in the time-saving gaming state is the game setting value. However, it is about 61% (59.90% to 61.81%) (see FIG. 10D).

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, in the probability change jackpot game, the game state of the transition destination after the end of the jackpot game depends on whether or not the gaming ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game. The transition to the ST-probable changing game state where the jackpot expectation in the support mode is high and the variable game digestion speed is slow, and the jackpot expectation in the high-frequency support mode is slightly lower than the ST sure variable game state and the variable game digestion speed is remarkable. It can be selected by the player's intention from any of the transition to the fast time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the player can, depending on his / her own intention, give priority to the digestion speed of the variable game or give priority to the jackpot expectation at the expense of the jackpot expectation to some extent. In a situation where the game time is limited, the digestion speed of the variable game can be prioritized over the jackpot expectation in the high frequency support mode. Thus, the possibility of terminating the high frequency support mode within the remaining time is increased, and so-called missing can be prevented. Also, even when the time-saving game state is selected, the jackpot expectation degree in the time-saving game state is only slightly lower than the jackpot expectation degree in the ST-variable game state. The reduction in the number of times can be reduced. As a result, the player can enjoy the advantage of being able to shorten the digestion time of the variable game without significantly reducing the jackpot expectation (expected jackpot count) by selecting the time saving game state.

  In the present embodiment, the variable prize device 35 operated for the normal round game of the jackpot game and the V prize device 36 operated for the V prize round game of the jackpot game are configured as a so-called double attacker provided separately. However, the variable winning device 35 may be omitted, and only the V winning device 36 may be provided, and the variable winning device 35 may be operated in both the normal round game and the V winning round game. In this case, the normal round game and the V winning round game are realized by one variable winning device 35 by allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 and the variable winning opening 363 by the switching member 365. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the average fluctuation display time in the time-saving game state (including the average fluctuation display time when the big hit is missed) is the average fluctuation display time in the ST sure change game state (the average fluctuation display time when the big hit is missed). Although the case where the setting is shorter than the above is described, the present invention can also be applied to a case where the mode is shifted to the low frequency support and low probability mode or the low frequency support and high probability mode after the end of the jackpot game, for example. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation display time) of the out-of-reach (reach out of front-rear and reach other than front-rear out) are set, and one fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of completely out of reach. Although set, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the out-of-reach (reach before and after out-of-reach and reach other than the out-of-front-rear) may be one, and the variation pattern (variable display time) of completely out of reach is plural. Is also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 is a V-ST probability changing machine has been described as an example, but the technical idea of the present embodiment, for example, shortening the average fluctuation display time in the time-saving gaming state than in the probability changing gaming state. The technical philosophy or the technical philosophy that allows the user to select the time saving game state and the probable change game state as the game state after the end of the big hit game in the big hit game can be shifted to one of the time reduction game state and the probable change game state after the big hit game ends The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines, for example, ST-variable machines and loop-variable machines. In the case of the ST probability variation machine or the loop probability variation machine, when the specific condition is satisfied in the probability variation jackpot game, for example, in the round game of the jackpot game, instead of entering the upper limit number of the game balls 99 into the variable winning device (variable winning opening), When a puncture (a so-called full open) in which the round game ends due to the lapse of the maximum opening time of the variable winning device (variable winning opening) occurs, it is possible to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the probable jackpot game. Conceivable. In addition, when a puncture occurs in a predetermined round game (for example, the last round game) of the jackpot game, a puncture occurs in a plurality of round games, and the like. The game may be shifted to the time-saving game state.

  In addition, since the V winning machine 364 and the switching member 365 are unnecessary in the ST probability changing machine and the loop probability changing machine, the V winning device 36 has the same structure as the variable winning device 35 by using the V winning port 364 and the switching member 365. Alternatively, even if the V winning device 36 is omitted, only the variable winning device 35 may be provided.

[Other embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in other embodiments described below, the description of the same configuration and the same steps as the processing procedure of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be omitted. In addition, each configuration and each processing function of the above-described first embodiment and other embodiments described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Second embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, the average fluctuation display time in the time-saving game state is set shorter than the average fluctuation display time in the ST-probable ST state. The case has been described.

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, the average fluctuation display time in the time-saving game state is set shorter than the average fluctuation display time in the ST sure change game state. However, in the variation pattern of the time-saving gaming state, the variation display time in the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back and reach other than out of front and back) is relatively long (15 seconds to 35 seconds). Such a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation display time in the time-saving game state has a longer fluctuation display time than a part (for example, completely out of) of the fluctuation patterns in the ST-probable change game state. Therefore, due to time constraints, players who intentionally select a time-saving gaming state in the hope that they will be able to use the variable game in the high-frequency support mode in a short period of time, It may be frustrated or frustrating to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation display time, despite the fact that is not the same. In particular, when a variation pattern having a relatively long variation display time is selected at a high ratio during a small number of variation games, for example, a variation pattern having a relatively long variation display time is continuously selected, higher frustration occurs. And stress.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the longest fluctuation display time in the fluctuation pattern in the time-saving gaming state is set shorter than the shortest fluctuation display time in the fluctuation pattern in the positive-variation gaming state. In this way, the longest fluctuation display time in the fluctuation pattern in the time-saving gaming state is set shorter than the shortest fluctuation display time in the fluctuation pattern in the positive-variation gaming state, so that any change in the time-saving gaming state is obtained. Even if a fluctuation pattern is selected, since all of the probable fluctuation game states are shorter than the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation pattern, due to time restrictions, it is necessary to complete the fluctuation game in the high frequency support mode in a short time. When the time-saving gaming state is intentionally selected as desired, it is possible to reduce frustration and stress caused by selecting a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation display time.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, in the V winning round game of the probability variable jackpot game, the V winning opening 364 until the game ball 99 is thrown into the V winning opening 364 or until the V winning round game ends. Has been described, the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 is permitted by opening the. That is, when the time saving game state is selected as the game state after the end of the big hit game, it is necessary to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game. In the game, the payout (prize ball) of the game ball 99 which is a privilege of the round game cannot be received. In other words, when the time saving game state is selected as the game state after the end of the jackpot game, it is necessary to abandon the prize ball for one round game, and the player can obtain one of the profits obtained in the jackpot game. You can not enjoy the department. In particular, in the 5R probability variable jackpot game, the number of round games is as small as five, and the disadvantage of abandoning the prize balls for one round game among them is great.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the V winning device is activated (the V winning door is opened), a V winning allowed state in which a game ball can enter the V winning opening, and a game ball enters the V winning opening. Even if it is not performed, it is possible to switch to a V winning restriction state in which the entry of gaming balls into the V winning opening is restricted while the entering of gaming balls into the variable winning opening is permitted. As described above, since the switching between the V prize allowable state and the V prize restricted state is possible, the launch of the game ball is stopped in the V prize allowable state so that the game sphere is not allowed to enter the V prize opening. By generating a V prize puncture and launching a game ball in the V prize restricted state, the game ball can enter the variable winning opening. In this way, in the V winning round game, a game ball is paid out by allowing the game ball to enter the variable winning opening while avoiding the entering of the game ball into the V winning opening and generating a V winning puncture. Can be. This makes it possible to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game without abandoning the prize balls for one round game.

  In the above-described first embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 is a jackpot, the game is distributed to either the probable jackpot or the normal jackpot. In the above, the case has been described where, when a V prize punk occurs in the V prize round game of the probability variable big hit game, the game is shifted to the time saving game state after the end of the probability variable big hit game. As described above, the V winning round game is executed in the probability changing jackpot game, the V winning round game is not executed in the normal jackpot game, and the normal jackpot game is at least the V winning round game compared to the probability changing jackpot game. The number is small. Therefore, in the normal jackpot, the profit obtained in the jackpot game is smaller than that in the probable jackpot game.

  On the other hand, the present embodiment is described in that, when a V winning puncture in which a game ball is not inserted into a V winning opening in a V round game in a probability variable jackpot game occurs, the game shifts to a time saving game state after the end of the probability variable jackpot game. Is common to the first embodiment, but when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, there is normally no distribution of the jackpots, and all jackpots are probable variable jackpots. As described above, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, all the jackpots are probable variable jackpots, so that the V winning round game is executed in all jackpot games, and the profit due to the V winning round game not being executed. (Award ball) can be avoided. In addition, since all the jackpots are probable jackpots, the game shifts to the time-saving game state only when a V winning punk occurs. Therefore, the transition to the time-saving gaming state has a meaning as a remedy for the V winning punk. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a novel gaming property in which, when a V winning puncture occurs, the game machine is shifted to the time-saving gaming state of the high-frequency support mode. For example, the V-prize puncture is not limited to the case where the player intentionally generates the V-prize puncture, and the case where the V-prize puncture occurs when the launch of the game ball is delayed in the V-round game, or when the launch is defective or the ball is jammed. Furthermore, by shifting to the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to enjoy the benefit of frequently operating the electric accessory.

  Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50, focusing on differences from the above-described first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 46A is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution table when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (A), when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by a prize in the first winning port 314, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability change jackpot is 0 to 98, 99 to 99. , And the number of random numbers that can be a 16R probability change jackpot is 99. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by a prize in the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers which are 5R probability variable jackpots is 95 from 0 to 94, and 16R probability variable jackpots. The number of such random numbers is five from 95 to 99. That is, in both the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, there is usually no big hit distribution, and a 100% certainty big hit. In other words, regardless of whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is notified by the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, after the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game (fluctuating game) are completed, it is determined that the large jackpot is changed. The game is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment, in the open / close execution mode of the probability-variable jackpot game, 5 or 16 round games including the V winning round game are executed according to the jackpot type. . Then, when the game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 in the V winning round game, the game is shifted to the ST sure change game state after the end of the jackpot game, and is shifted to the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game. When the game ball 99 is not thrown in (when a V winning puncture occurs), the game is shifted to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game.

  In the distribution table shown in FIG. 46 (A), in both the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, there is no distribution of a normal jackpot and a 100% probability of changing a large jackpot. In the case of the above, a 100% probability of changing the jackpot may be set, and in the case of the second special symbol game, the distribution of the normal jackpot may be set. In other words, in the present embodiment, the first hit is always a probable big hit, and the extended bonfire may or may not include the normal big hit as long as it includes at least the probable big hit.

  In this manner, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, all jackpots are probable change jackpots. Loss of profit (prize ball) can be avoided. In addition, since all the jackpots are probable jackpots, the time saving game state is shifted only to the V winning punk. Therefore, the transition to the time-saving gaming state has a meaning as a remedy for the V winning punk. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a novel gaming property in which, when a V winning puncture occurs, the game machine is shifted to the time-saving gaming state of the high-frequency support mode.

  Here, FIG. 46 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the ST probability change game state deviation change table, and FIG. 46 (C) is a diagram showing an example of the time reduction game state deviation change table. 46B and 46C, only the variable display time is described. The variation pattern type is omitted.

  In the ST probability change game state deviation change table shown in FIG. 46B, when the deviation type is out of reach, when the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 74, 18s is selected as the fluctuation display time (variation pattern), When it is 75 to 124, 45 s is selected as the variable display time, and when it is 125 to 199, 90 s is selected as the variable display time. In the ST probability change game state deviation change table, when the deviation type is completely deviated, and when the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 199, 6 s is selected as the fluctuation display time. That is, in the ST-probable game state, the variable display time when the type of deviation is complete deviation is fixed to one type of 6 s. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of the range in the ST sure change game state, the average fluctuation display time of the fluctuation game is 11.49 seconds.

  In addition, in the time-saving game state deviation fluctuation table shown in FIG. 46C, when the deviation type is deviation reach, when the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 199, 5.5 s is displayed as the fluctuation display time (variation pattern). Selected. That is, in the time-saving gaming state, the variable display time when the type of departure is deviated reach is fixed to one type of 5.5 s. Further, in the time-saving game state variation table, when the type of deviation is completely off, and when the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 199, 3 s is selected as the variation display time. That is, in the time-saving gaming state, the variable display time when the type of departure is completely deviated is fixed to one type of 3 s. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of place in the time-saving game state, the average fluctuation display time of the fluctuation game is 3.3 seconds, which is significantly shorter than that in the ST-probable game state.

  Here, in the ST odd variation game state deviation fluctuation table, the minimum time of the fluctuation display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the ST probability variable game state is deviation is set to 6 seconds when the deviation type is completely deviation. ing. On the other hand, in the time-short game state deviation fluctuation table, the maximum time of the fluctuation display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the time-short game state is deviated is set to 5.5 seconds when the deviation type is deviated from reach. . That is, the maximum time of the variable display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state is out of range is shorter than the minimum time of the variable display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the ST sure change game state is out of order. Is set.

  In this manner, the maximum time of the variable display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the time saving game state is out of range is longer than the minimum time of the variable display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the ST sure change game state is out of place. Is also set shorter, the fluctuation display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state is out of order is more reliable than the fluctuation display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the ST sure change game state is out of order. Can be shortened. Therefore, if there is a time constraint and the player wishes to quickly complete the variable game in the high-frequency support mode, and intentionally generates a V-prize puncture and selects the time-saving game state, the ST probability change Since a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation display time than the fluctuation display time in the gaming state is not selected, it is possible to digest at high speed without feeling frustrated or stressed in a fluctuation game out of the time reduction gaming state. .

  In addition, the maximum time of the variable display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the time saving game state is a big hit is shorter than the minimum time of the variable display time when the result of the big hit lottery in the ST sure change game state is a big hit. It is also possible to set. In this case as well, as in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, it is possible to perform high-speed digestion without feeling frustration and stress in the jackpot fluctuation game in the time saving game state.

  In addition, the maximum time of the variable display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the time-saving gaming state is a big hit, not only the minimum time of the variable display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the ST sure change game state is a big It is also conceivable to set the variable display time shorter than the minimum time of the variable display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the ST-probable gaming state is out of order. In this case, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot lottery in the time-saving gaming state is a big hit or a loss, the variable display time in the time-saving gaming state can be reliably shortened as compared to the ST-variable gaming state. As a result, it is possible to more reliably eliminate the frustration and stress in the jackpot fluctuation game in the time reduction game state.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the variable display time when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state is out of reach is different between the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back and reach other than out of front and back) and completely out of reach. However, the variable display time at the time of departure may be the same for reach departure and complete departure. For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the time-saving gaming state is out of order, the variable display time is 3 in both the out-of-reach and completely out-of-reach situations, as shown in the time-saving gaming state out-of-life variation table shown in FIG. Fixed to one type of seconds. Also in this case, the maximum time (3 seconds in the example of FIG. 46 (D)) of the variable display time when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the time saving game state is out of order is the big win lottery in the ST sure change game state. It is set shorter than the variable display time when the lottery result is off.

  As described above, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the time saving game state is out of range, the variable display time is one type (3 seconds in the present embodiment) regardless of whether it is out of reach or completely out of reach. , It is possible to repeatedly execute a variable game in a time-saving game state in a short time with a constant rhythm. This makes it possible to more reliably eliminate stress in the time-saving gaming state. Of course, the variable display time when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the time-saving gaming state is a big hit is one of the same time as the variable display time when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state is out. May be fixed, and in this case, it is also possible to more reliably eliminate the stress in the time-saving gaming state.

[Big hit game control processing]
In the above-mentioned probability changing big hit game of the first embodiment, the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 is allowed by the start of the V winning round game of the big hit game, and the game is given to the V winning opening 364. When the ball 99 is thrown in, or when the V winning round game is finished without the game ball 99 being thrown into the V winning opening 364, the ball entry of the gaming ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 is restricted. You.

  On the other hand, in the (probable change) jackpot game of this embodiment, even before the end of the V winning round game, the maximum operation of the V winning device 36 is allowed after the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning opening 364. The game ball 99 is inserted into the V winning opening 364 of the V winning device 36 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 to 15 seconds) set shorter than the time (the maximum opening time of the V winning door 362) (for example, 30 seconds). Is not entered, the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 is restricted. That is, an upper limit (constant time) is set for the time during which the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning opening 364, and when a certain time elapses without the gaming ball 99 entering the V winning opening 364. The entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 is restricted, and the entering of the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 363 is permitted.

  In this manner, when a certain period of time has elapsed without the game ball 99 entering the V winning opening 364, the entering of the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 364 is restricted, and the game ball 99 entering the variable winning opening 363 is restricted. Is allowed, in the V winning round game, the game ball 99 enters the variable winning opening 363 while avoiding the entering of the gaming ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 and generating a V winning puncture. The ball can be paid out by playing the game ball 99. This makes it possible to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game without abandoning the prize balls for one round game.

  Here, FIG. 47 to FIG. 49 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, with respect to the jackpot game control process of the present embodiment, differences from the jackpot game control process of the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49.

<Steps S2701 and S2702>
As shown in FIG. 47, in the jackpot game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 sets a V winning door opening flag indicating that the V winning door 362 is open, that is, that the V round game is being executed. Not only is set to ON (step S2142), a V winning door opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the V winning door 362 is set (step S2143), but the V winning opening 364 is opened (game to the V winning opening 364). A V winning opening opening flag indicating that the ball 99 is allowed to enter is set to ON (step S2701), and a V winning opening opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the V winning opening 364 is set (step S2701). Step S2702).

  As the value of the V winning opening opening time counter, for example, the closing condition of the V winning door 362, the elapse of the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the V winning door 362, or the upper limit number (for example, 10) to the V winning device 36. When the game ball 99 is entered, a value corresponding to a time obtained by subtracting a time during which the upper limit number of the game balls 99 can enter the V winning device 36 from the maximum opening time is set. Specifically, when the maximum opening time is 30 seconds and the upper limit is 10, and the firing interval of the game balls 99 is 0.6 seconds, the value of the V winning opening time counter is 5 seconds to 15 seconds. It is set as a value corresponding to the time selected from the range. In this manner, as the value of the V winning opening time counter (V winning opening maximum opening time), the maximum number of game balls 99 can enter the V winning device 36 from the maximum opening time of the V winning device 362. By setting the value corresponding to the time obtained by subtracting the time, in the V winning game, the upper limit is set between the time when the V winning opening 364 is closed and the time when the V winning door 362 is closed due to the elapse of the maximum opening time. A number of game balls 99 can be made to enter the variable winning opening 362. Therefore, in the V winning game, the payout of the game ball 99 is performed by avoiding the entering of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 and generating the V winning puncture while allowing the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning opening 363. Can receive. Thereby, it is possible to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game without abandoning all the prize balls for one round game. In particular, in the V winning game, since the upper limit number of game balls 99 can be entered after the V winning port 364 is closed, the maximum profit that can be enjoyed in the round game can be enjoyed.

<Step S2703>
As shown in FIG. 48, when the V winning door opening flag is set to ON (step S2146: Yes), that is, when the V winning round game is being executed, the MPU 41 opens the V winning opening 364. It is determined whether or not the V winning opening opening flag indicating that the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the V winning opening 364 is turned on. In other words, the MPU 41 is in a V winning allowable state in which the gaming balls 99 can enter the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game, or the entering of the gaming balls 99 into the V winning opening 364 is restricted. It is determined based on the V winning opening opening flag whether or not the V winning restricting state in which the game ball 99 can enter the variable winning opening 362 is permitted.

  The MPU 41 shifts the processing to the step S2152 in FIG. 49 when the V winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2703: NO), that is, when the V winning limit is in the restricted state, and the first execution described above. Similar to the jackpot game control process in the embodiment, the processes from step S2152 to step S2161 are executed, and the jackpot game control process ends.

<Steps S2704 and S2705>
When the V winning opening opening flag is set to ON (step S2703: YES), that is, when the V winning is permitted state, the MPU 41 determines that the gaming ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 364. It is determined whether the flag is set to ON (step S2147). When the V winning flag is set to ON (step S2147: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2148, and performs the steps S2148 to S2148 in the same manner as in the jackpot game control processing in the above-described first embodiment. The processing of S2151 is executed.

  However, in the jackpot game control process of the present embodiment, unlike the jackpot game control process of the above-described first embodiment, after setting the special figure high probability mode flag to ON (step S2151), the V winning opening is opened. The time counter is cleared (step S2704), and the V winning opening opening flag is set to off (step S2705). That is, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 364, the value of the V winning opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the V winning opening 364 is forcibly set to zero and the V winning is achieved. The V winning opening opening flag is set to OFF so that the opening 364 is determined to be closed. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2154 in FIG. 49, executes the processing from step S2154 to step S2161 in the same manner as the jackpot game control processing in the above-described first embodiment, and executes the jackpot game control processing. finish.

  In the jackpot game control process of the present embodiment, the V winning port opening time counter is cleared in step S2704 and the V winning port opening flag is set to off in step S2705. By rotating the switching member 365 of the winning device 36 in the counterclockwise direction, the switching member 365 is controlled to the lower left state (step S2149). This allows the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning opening 363 of the V winning device 36, while restricting the game ball 99 from entering the V winning opening 364 (FIG. 7A to FIG. 7A). FIG. 7 (C)).

<Steps S2706 and S2707>
If the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S2147: NO), the MPU 41 decrements the value of the V winning opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the V winning opening 364 by 1 (step S2706). It is determined whether or not the value of the V winning opening time counter is zero (step S2707). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to close the V winning opening 364 after the elapse of the V winning maximum opening time.

  When the value of the V winning opening opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2707: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2149. That is, when the value of the V winning opening opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2707: Yes), the MPU 41 reaches the timing to close the V winning opening 364 after a certain time has elapsed since the opening of the V winning opening 364. Since it can be determined that the game has been performed, the switching member 365 of the V winning device 36 is rotated counterclockwise to control the switching member 365 to the lower left state, thereby closing the V winning opening 364 (step S2149). Also, when the V winning opening 364 is closed after a certain period of time has elapsed since the opening of the V winning opening 364, the V winning opening opening flag is set in the same manner as when the gaming ball 99 is thrown into the V winning opening 364. Is set to off (step S2705), the processing of steps S2152 to S2161 in FIG. 49 is executed, and the big hit game control processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the V winning opening opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2707: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2152 in FIG. 49, and performs the big hit game control in the first embodiment described above. Similarly to the processing, the processing from step S2152 to step S2161 is executed, and the jackpot game control processing ends.

  In the jackpot game control process of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a V winning round game is started, a V winning allowed state in which the game ball 99 can enter the V winning opening 364 is set. When the gaming ball 99 is thrown into the V winning opening 364 in the V winning allowed state, the V winning opening 364 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the big hit game control process of the present embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the V winning opening 364 is opened without the gaming ball 99 being thrown into the V winning opening 364 in the V winning allowed state. When a certain time has elapsed since the completion of the operation (when the value of the V winning opening opening time counter becomes 0), the V winning opening 364 is closed. The predetermined time from the opening of the V winning opening 364 to the closing of the V winning opening 364 (the time corresponding to the initial value of the V winning opening opening time counter) is, for example, the V winning door 362 as described above. If the closing condition is that the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the V winning door 362 has elapsed or the upper limit number (for example, 10) of the game balls 99 has been entered into the V winning device 36, the maximum opening time The time is set to a value obtained by subtracting the time during which the maximum number of game balls 99 can enter the V winning device 36. On the other hand, the closing of the V winning opening 364 is executed by rotating the switching member 365 of the V winning device 36 in a counterclockwise direction to control the switching member 365 to the lower left state. In the case of the falling state, the entry of the game ball 99 into the variable winning opening 363 is allowed. Therefore, even after the V winning opening 364 is closed, the opening of the V winning door 362 is continued, and the entering of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 is restricted while the gaming ball 99 enters the variable winning opening 363. Is set in a V winning restriction state in which is allowed. In the V-winning restriction state, at least the time during which the upper limit number of game balls 99 can enter the V-winning device 36 continues.

  As described above, in the V winning round game, a V winning allowable state in which the game ball 99 can enter the V winning opening 364 and the V winning opening 364 even when the gaming ball 99 does not enter the V winning opening 364. It is possible to switch to a V winning restriction state in which the entering of the gaming ball 99 is restricted while the entering of the gaming ball 99 to the variable winning opening 363 is permitted while the entering of the gaming ball 99 is restricted. Since the switching between the V-winning permitted state and the V-winning restricted state is possible, it is possible to prevent the gaming balls 99 from entering the V-winning opening 364 by stopping the launch of the gaming balls 99 in the V-winning permitted state. While the V winning puncture is generated, the gaming balls 99 are launched into the variable winning opening 363 by launching the gaming balls 99 in the right area of the gaming board 31 in the V winning restriction state. Thereby, in the V winning round game, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the V winning opening 364 while receiving the payout of the gaming ball 99 by causing the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 363. Thereby, it is possible to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game without abandoning all the prize balls for one round game.

  In the V-winning restriction state, at least the time during which the upper limit number of game balls 99 can enter the V-winning device 36 continues. Therefore, in the V winning round game, the upper limit number of gaming balls 99 can be allowed to enter the variable winning opening 363 while avoiding the entering of the gaming balls 99 into the V winning opening 364 and generating a V winning puncture. . This allows the player to receive the maximum profit (prize ball) even when generating a V prize punk in the V prize round game in order to shift to the time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. it can.

  Here, FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of the display screen on the symbol display unit in the V winning round game of the jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, when the V winning opening 364 is opened in the V winning round game, the symbol display section 341 displays an image similar to that of the first embodiment (FIG. 45A). In addition, an image that indicates or suggests the timing at which the V winning opening 364 is closed is displayed. In FIG. 50A, a character image of “until V winning opening is closed” and an image of “10 seconds” for counting down the time until the V winning opening 364 is closed are displayed in the right area of the symbol display section 341. Thus, the timing at which the V winning opening 364 is closed is suggested. In this case, when the countdown display becomes “0 second”, the timing at which the V winning opening 364 is closed is specified.

  In addition, in the V winning round game, when the V winning opening 364 is opened, the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 to explicitly or suggest the timing of closing the V winning opening 364 is, for example, the V winning opening 364 is closed. A mere number (not a number of seconds) that counts down the time until it is displayed, or a result of increasing or decreasing the memory of the meter or gauge (for example, by changing the memory from the minimum to the maximum, the V winning opening 364 is closed. And the use of explosives such as bombs and dynamite (explosives that explicitly indicate or suggest the time to complete, and that indicate the closing timing of the V winning opening 364 by the maximum memory, or vice versa). By notifying or suggesting the explosion, the closing of the V winning opening 364 is suggested, and the explosive explosion causes the closing of the V winning opening 364. The chain timing is specified), the character string is increased or decreased (for example, the character string “V winning opening closed” is changed to “V” → “V entering” →... → “V winning opening closed” → “V The character string of "V prize mouth open" is changed to "V prize mouth open" → "V prize mouth open" → ... "V in" → "V" ”→“ ”), increase or decrease of the number of characters (displays a specified number of characters in sequence, conversely deletes a specified number of characters in sequence), Sugoroku, etc. (For example, when the character moves from the start point to the goal point, the time until the V winning opening 364 is closed is indicated, and when the character arrives at the goal, the character moves to the goal point. Closing of winning opening 364 Which clearly indicates the password). Further, in the V winning round game, when the V winning opening 364 is open, an image that indicates or suggests the timing at which the V winning opening 364 is closed displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is the V winning opening 364 is closed. In this case, an image indicating only that the V winning opening 364 is closed, for example, a character image of “V winning opening closed” may be used.

  As described above, when the V winning opening 364 is opened in the V winning round game, an image indicating or suggesting the timing at which the V winning opening 364 is closed is displayed on the symbol display portion 341, and the image is displayed on the image. It is possible to know the timing at which the V winning opening 364 is closed based on this, and it is possible to know at least that the V winning opening 364 has been closed. Therefore, when it is desired to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game by avoiding the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 364 and generating a V winning puncture, the V winning opening 364 is closed. The timing of launching the game ball 99 can be grasped by referring to an image that indicates or suggests the timing of the game ball 99, and the maximum number of game balls 99 can enter the variable winning opening 363 while reliably generating a V winning puncture. Becomes possible.

  Note that, in the V winning round game, when the game ball 99 is thrown into the V winning opening 364, or when a certain time has elapsed since the opening of the V winning opening 364, the V winning opening 364 is closed. In the case where the V winning port 364 is closed by the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning port 364, as shown in FIG. 45B, the V winning round game is completed until the V winning round game is completed as in the first embodiment. The image is displayed, and the image shown in FIG. 45C is displayed in the ending. On the other hand, when the V winning opening 364 is closed after a certain period of time has passed since the opening of the V winning opening 364, the image shown in FIG. 50B is displayed until the V winning round game ends, and the image shown in FIG. The image shown in (D) is displayed. Here, the image shown in FIG. 50B is an image for urging the player to make a right hit in order to allow the game ball 99 to enter the variable winning opening 363. In the example shown in FIG. 50B, a character image of “Aim at V attacker by right-handing!” Prompts the player to enter game ball 99 into variable winning opening 363.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum time of the variable display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state is out of order is the case where the result of the jackpot lottery in the ST sure change game state is out of order. Is set to be shorter than the minimum time of the variable display time, the variable display time when the result of the jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state is out of order, the result of the large jackpot lottery in the ST sure change game state is out of order. In this case, the display time can be reliably shortened. Therefore, if there is a time constraint and the player wishes to quickly complete the variable game in the high-frequency support mode, and intentionally generates a V-prize puncture and selects the time-saving game state, the ST probability change Since a fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation display time is longer than the fluctuation display time in the game state is not selected, it is possible to perform high-speed digestion without feeling stress in a fluctuation game that is out of place in the time reduction game state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the V winning round game, a V winning allowed state in which the game ball 99 can be put in the V winning opening 364 and the V winning opening even when the gaming ball 99 is not put in the V winning opening 364. In the V-winning permitted state, it is possible to switch to a V-winning restricted state in which the entering of the gaming ball 99 to the variable winning opening 363 is permitted while the entering of the gaming ball 99 to the variable winning opening 363 is restricted. While the launch of the game ball 99 is stopped or the like, the V-prize puncture is generated by preventing the game ball 99 from entering the V-prize opening 364, while the game ball to the right area of the game board 31 in the V-prize restricted state. By launching 99, the game ball 99 can enter the variable winning opening 363. Thereby, in the V winning round game, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the V winning opening 364 while receiving the payout of the gaming ball 99 by causing the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 363. Thereby, it is possible to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game without abandoning all the prize balls for one round game.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, all jackpots are probable variable jackpots, so that all jackpot games include a V winning round game and a V winning round game is included. Loss of profits (prize balls) can be avoided by not having them. In addition, since all the jackpots are probable jackpots, the time saving game state is shifted only to the V winning punk. Therefore, the transition to the time-saving gaming state has a meaning as a remedy for the V winning punk. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a novel gaming property in which, when a V winning puncture occurs, the game machine is shifted to the time-saving gaming state of the high-frequency support mode.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum opening period of the V winning opening 364 in the V winning round game is set from the start of the V winning round game until a certain time has elapsed, but the maximum opening period of the V winning opening 364 is set. May be another timing. For example, the maximum opening period of the V winning opening 364 may be set to be started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the V winning round game, and to be ended after a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the V winning opening 364.

  In the present embodiment, the indication or suggestion of the timing at which the V winning opening 364 is closed may be executed in another form in addition to or instead of the image displayed by the symbol display unit 341. For example, the indication or suggestion of the timing at which the V winning opening 364 is closed is determined by counting down a number indicating the time until the V winning opening 364 is closed on a display device other than the symbol display unit 341, for example, a 7-segment display device. The display may be an image display by an image display device other than the symbol display unit 341. In the latter case, it is conceivable to display on the image display device an image exemplified as the indication or suggestion of the timing at which the V winning opening 364 in the symbol display unit 341 is closed.

  Further, the indication or suggestion of the timing at which the V winning opening 364 is closed may be made by opening the V winning door 362. In this case, as an opening form of the V winning door 362 of the V winning round game, for example, middle opening (for example, opening for 10 seconds) → middle interval (for example, closing for 5 seconds) → long opening (for example, opening for 20 seconds) can be considered. Instead of the interval, a form in which the short opening is repeated (for example, the opening of 0.1 seconds → the closing of 0.1 seconds →... → the repeating of the opening of 0.1 seconds) is considered. Then, the cheer folk implement in which the middle interval and the short opening are repeatedly performed may be explicitly or suggested as the timing at which the V winning opening 364 is switched from the open state to the closed state. Conversely, the repetition of the middle interval and the short opening may be explicitly or suggested as the timing at which the V winning opening 364 is switched from the closed state to the open state.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 is a V-ST probability changing machine has been described as an example, but the technical idea of the present embodiment, for example, the maximum value of the variable display time in the time-saving gaming state is the probability changing gaming state. The technical concept that is set to be smaller than the minimum value of the fluctuation display time also applies to gaming machines that can shift to one of the time-saving gaming state and the probable changing gaming state after the end of the big hit game, for example, the ST probable changing machine and the loop probable changing machine. It is possible. In addition, since the V winning device 364 and the switching member 365 are unnecessary in the ST probability changing machine and the loop probability changing machine, the V winning device 36 has the same structure as the variable winning device 35 by using the V winning port 364 and the switching member 365. Alternatively, even if the V winning device 36 is omitted, only the variable winning device 35 may be provided.

[Summary of the Invention]
Hereinafter, the outline of the invention extracted from the above-described embodiment will be additionally described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each of the supplementary notes and the embodiment, explanations may be made by attaching reference numerals and the like for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary notes is limited to a specific configuration given the reference numerals. is not. Further, each configuration and each processing function described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Appendix A1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
After the end of the special game (big hit game), the result of the shift determination by the first game state (low probability mode) or the shift determining means (41) is to shift to the special game state (big hit game). State transition means (41) for transitioning to a second game state (high probability mode) having a transition determination probability (big hit probability) higher than the first game state (low probability mode);
Notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determination means (41);
With
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of special symbols) of the notification game (variable game) is set shorter in the first game state (low probability mode) than in the second game state (low probability mode). A gaming machine characterized by being.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, after the end of the special game, the first game state in which the transition determination probability to the special game state is low and the average game time of the notification game is short, or the transition determination probability is high and the average game time of the notification game is high. The game is shifted to the long second game state. In other words, after the end of the special game, the game is shifted to one of the two game states having the opposite characteristics with respect to the shift determination probability and the average game time. With this, the playability is improved.

  Here, in the first game state, since the average game time of the notification game is shorter than in the second game state, more transition judgments are made in the same time than in the second game state, and more notification games are performed. Has the advantage of being performed. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the transition determination probability is higher than in the first gaming state, and there is an advantage that the transition to the special gaming state is easier than in the first gaming state.

  As described above, the first game state and the second game state have respective advantages, but many players desire to shift to the second game state in which the special game state is easily shifted after the special game state ends. Then, the player does not wish to be shifted to the first game state. However, when playing a game in a game hall, the user may encounter a situation in which the game time is limited, such as when the time until the game hall closes is short, or when the time until the store closes is short due to use or the like. In this case, some players may wish to receive more transition determinations and perform more notification games in the same time period than in the second game state. In such a situation, the first game state that is disliked by many players may be desired, so that it is possible to meet the needs of the players whose remaining game time is limited.

[Appendix A2]
The state transition means (41) is provided after the end of the special game (big hit game) when a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364) is satisfied in the special game (big hit game). The state is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode), and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the special game (big hit game), the first game state (low probability mode) after the end of the special game (big hit game) The gaming machine according to attachment A1, wherein the game machine is shifted to (1).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2, whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game depends on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game. Therefore, in a special game that tends to be boring, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game by focusing on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine according to attachment A2, wherein the success or failure of the predetermined condition is selectable by a player in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A3, it is possible to select whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a special game by a player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game according to the intention of the player, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when there is a restriction on the game time, the player is less likely to make a transition determination to the special game state, but to effectively utilize the remaining game time and receive as many transition determinations as possible. It is also possible to select the first game state in which the average game time of the notification game is short according to the user's own intention in accordance with the game time that has been set.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2 or A3, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through a specific area (364).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A4, since the predetermined condition is established when the vehicle passes through the specific area, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, it can be more enjoyed whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the state is shifted to the second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, even in a special game in which a game is likely to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not a game ball passes through a specific area.

[Appendix A5]
The special game (jackpot game) includes a first special game (probably variable jackpot game) in which a special unit game (V winning round game) in which a game ball can enter the special entrance port (V winning port 364) is executed. A second special game (normal jackpot game) in which the special unit game (V winning round game) is not executed,
The gaming machine according to attachment A4, wherein the specific area (364) is the special entrance (V winning opening 364).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A5, as a special game, a first special game in which a special unit game in which a game ball can enter the special entrance is executed, and a special game in which a game ball can enter the special entrance. A second special game in which the unit game is not executed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the result of the transition determination by the transition determining means is to be shifted to the first special game having a high transition determination probability after the execution of the special game. Can be. Further, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special entrance, which is a condition for shifting to the first special game state after the execution of the special game, in the special unit game. Therefore, the player can prevent the game ball from entering the special entrance by an easy action such as stopping the launch of the game ball in the special unit game.

[Appendix A6]
In the first game state and the second game state, the state transition means (41) executes the transition determination (big hit lottery) of the upper limit number (for example, 90) or the notification game (variable game) by being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A5, wherein the game machine shifts to a gaming state in which the frequency or probability of being switched to the allowable state is lower than the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A6, after the end of the special game, the frequency or the probability that the game ball is switched to the allowable state in which the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area is given to give an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball is high. The game is shifted to the first game state. That is, after the end of the special game, the game state is shifted to the first game state which is advantageous to the player who easily passes the game ball to the predetermined area and easily performs the shift determination (notification game). Therefore, it is expected that the upper limit number of notification games will be executed in a short time until the first state is ended, and as a result, the special game will be executed in a short time after the end of the special game.

[Appendix A7]
The state transition means (41) is provided after the end of the special game (big hit game) when a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364) is satisfied in the special game (big hit game). When the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the special game (big hit game), the first game state (time-saving game) is ended after the special game (big hit game) ends. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A6, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to (state).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7, whether to shift to the first gaming state or the second gaming state after the end of the special game depends on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game. Therefore, in a special game that tends to be boring, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game by focusing on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A8]
The gaming machine according to attachment A7, wherein the success or failure of the predetermined condition is selectable by a player in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A8, it is possible to select whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a special game by a player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game according to the intention of the player, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the game time is limited, the player is less likely to make a transition to the special game state, but receives the transition judgment as much as possible by effectively utilizing the remaining game time. It is also possible to select the first game state in which the average game time of the notification game is short in accordance with the game time.

[Appendix A9]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A6 to A8, wherein the average playing time of the (fluctuating game) is 75% or less of the average playing time (the average fluctuating display time of the special symbol).

[Appendix A10]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A6 to A8, wherein the gaming time is equal to or less than 50% of an average game time of the (fluctuating game) (an average fluctuation display time of a special symbol).

[Appendix A11]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A6 to A8, wherein the gaming time is 40% or less of the average game time of the (fluctuating game) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol).

[Appendix A12]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A6 to A8, wherein the gaming time is 30% or less of an average game time of the (variable game) (an average fluctuation display time of a special symbol).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A9 to A12, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is, for example, 75% or less, preferably 50% or less of the average game time of the notification game in the second game state. And more preferably 40% or less, and still more preferably 30% or less. As described above, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is in the above range with respect to the average game time of the notification game in the second game state, so that the average game time in the first game state is: A significant difference can be provided for the average game time in the second game state. Further, when the first game state or the second game state is ended by the transition determination of the upper limit number or the execution of the notification game, the first game state is ended with respect to a time required until the first game state is ended. There can be a clear difference in the time required. Therefore, when the player desires to prioritize a shorter average fluctuation display time over a higher transition determination probability, for example, when there is a restriction on the player's playing time, the request must be made surely. Can be satisfied.

[Appendix A13]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A9 to A12, wherein the gaming time is 1% or more of the average game time of the (variable game) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol).

[Appendix A14]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A9 to A12, wherein the gaming time is 5% or more of the average game time of the (fluctuating game) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A13 and A14, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is, for example, 1% or more, preferably 5% or more of the average game time of the notification game in the second game state. It is. As described above, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is in the above range with respect to the average game time of the notification game in the second game state, so that the average game time in the first game state is extremely high. It is prevented from becoming too short. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the first gaming state caused by the notification game in the first gaming state being repeated in a short time is prevented.

[Appendix A15]
The notification game (fluctuating game) when the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) is not to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) (when the lottery result is out of order). The average game time (average fluctuation display time of special symbols) is set shorter in the first game state (low probability mode) than in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A5.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A15, after the end of the special game, the average game time of the notification game in which the transition determination probability to the special game state is low and the result of the transition determination does not shift to the special game state is short. The game state is shifted to the second game state in which one game state or the average game time of the notification game is long in the case where the shift determination probability is high and the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. In other words, after the end of the special game, the game is shifted to one of two game states having conflicting characteristics with respect to the shift determination probability and the average game time when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, the player is interested in which game state is to be shifted to, thereby improving the playability.

  Here, the first game state is shorter than the second game state because the average game time of the notification game is shorter when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. There is an advantage that more transition games are received and more notification games are executed compared to the state. In particular, the deviation determination probability that the result of the shift determination is determined not to be shifted to the special game state is significantly lower than the shift determination probability that the result of the shift determination is shifted to the special game state, and most of the results of the shift determination are special. The game state is not shifted. Therefore, in the first game state, the average game time of the notification game in the case where the result of the transition determination is not the transition to the special game state is set to be short, so that the average of the notification game in the first game state with respect to the entirety is set. It is possible to effectively shorten the game time, receive more transition determinations than in the second game state within the same time, and execute more notification games. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the transition determination probability is higher than in the first gaming state, and there is an advantage that the transition to the special gaming state is easier than in the first gaming state.

  As described above, the first game state and the second game state have respective advantages, but many players desire to shift to the second game state in which the special game state is easily shifted after the special game state ends. Then, the player does not wish to be shifted to the first game state. However, when playing a game in a game hall, the user may encounter a situation in which the game time is limited, such as when the time until the game hall closes is short, or when the time until the store closes is short due to use or the like. In this case, some players may wish to receive more transition determinations and perform more notification games in the same time period than in the second game state. In such a situation, the first game state that is disliked by many players may be desired, so that it is possible to meet the needs of the players whose remaining game time is limited.

[Appendix A16]
The state transition means (41) is provided after the end of the special game (big hit game) when a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364) is satisfied in the special game (big hit game). The state is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode), and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the special game (big hit game), the first game state (low probability mode) after the end of the special game (big hit game) The gaming machine according to supplementary note A15, wherein the game machine is shifted to (1).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A16, whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game depends on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game. Therefore, in a special game that tends to be boring, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game by focusing on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A17]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A16, wherein whether the predetermined condition is satisfied or not can be selected by a player in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17, it is possible to select whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a special game by a player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game according to the intention of the player, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the game time is limited, the player is less likely to make a transition to the special game state, but receives the transition judgment as much as possible by effectively utilizing the remaining game time. It is also possible to select the first game state in which the average game time of the notification game is short in accordance with the game time.

[Appendix A18]
A restricted state that restricts the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area (315) that gives an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball, and an allowable state that allows the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area (315) And an electric accessory (315b) for switching between
The first gaming state (low-probability mode) and the second gaming state (high-probability mode) are in a first state (high-frequency support mode) in which the frequency or probability of being switched to the allowable state by the electric accessory (315b) is high. Time saving game state or ST probable game state)
The state shifting means (41) shifts to the first state (high frequency support mode) after the end of the special game (big hit game), and in the first state (high frequency support mode), the upper limit number (for example, 90) When the shift determination (big hit lottery) or the notification game (fluctuating game) is executed, the frequency or the probability of being switched to the allowable state by the electric accessory (315b) is the first state (high frequency support mode). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A15 to A17, wherein the game machine shifts to a second state lower than the second state (normal state in the low-frequency support mode).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A18, after the end of the special game, the frequency or the probability that the game ball is switched to the allowable state in which the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is given to give an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball is high. The game is shifted to the first game. That is, in the first game, the frequency with which the game ball passes through the predetermined area is increased, so that the frequency of occurrence of the non-game period in which the notification game is not executed is reduced, and the non-game period is generated even when the non-game period occurs. Is shortened. Therefore, in the first game, as compared with the second state in which the frequency or the probability of switching to the allowable state in which the passing of the game ball in the predetermined area is allowed is lower, the number of the transition determination or the notification game executed per unit time is smaller. More. Thereby, after the end of the special game, the time until the transition determination of the upper limit number or the notification game is executed is shortened by shifting to the first state, so that the first state is the first game state. In this case, the first state can be completed in a shorter time.

[Appendix A19]
A symbol display means (341) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) in the notification game (variable game);
In the notification game (fluctuating game), the symbols (decorative symbols) are displayed on the symbol display means (341), and the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determination means (41) is the special game (big hit). The first symbol combination (symbol combination of big hits) indicating that the game is to be shifted to (game), and the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) is applied to the special game (big hit game). Symbol control means (51) for stopping and displaying a second symbol combination (outlier symbol combination) indicating not to be shifted;
Further comprising
The symbol control means (51) controls the first symbol combination (big hit symbol combination) and the final symbol until the last stop symbol of the plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) is stopped and displayed. From the variable display state (reach state) in which it is impossible to determine which of the second symbol combinations (outcoming symbol combinations) is to be stopped and displayed, the last symbol is stopped and displayed so that the second symbol combination (outcoming symbols) is stopped. The plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) can be displayed in a variable and stopped manner by an off-variation display mode (reach out-of-reach effect pattern) which is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination.
The plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) when the symbols (three decorative symbols) are fluctuated and stopped in the deviation variation display mode (reach deviating effect pattern) by the symbol control means (51). Wherein the average fluctuation display time (average fluctuation display time) is set shorter in the first game state (low probability mode) than in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any of supplementary notes A18.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A19, when the notification game is executed, the symbol control means changes the average display time of the plurality of symbols when the plurality of symbols are displayed in the variable display mode and the variable display is stopped. The game state is set shorter than the second game state. Here, in the deviation variation display mode, the first symbol combination (big hit symbol combination) and the second symbol combination (missing symbol combination) are displayed until the last stop symbol of the plurality of symbols that is stopped and displayed last is stopped and displayed. ), The final stop symbol is stopped and displayed from the variable display state (reach state) where it is impossible to determine which of the symbols is stopped and displayed, and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol combination (out of symbol combination). In such a deviation variation display mode, the variation display time of a plurality of symbols (game time of the notification game) is generally long, so that the average variation display time of the deviation variation display mode is greater in the first game state than in the second game state. Is also set to be shorter, it is possible to easily set the average fluctuation display time of the first gaming state shorter than that of the second gaming state. In addition, by setting the variable display time of the plurality of symbols in the deviation variation display mode in the first game state to be short, unnecessary time is consumed for the notification game that is deviation in the first game state. Is prevented.

[Appendix A20]
The out-of-place variation display mode (out-of-reach effect pattern) is characterized in that the first game state (low-probability mode) is less likely to be selected than the second game state (high-probability mode), and the out-of-reach variation display mode (reach out-of-reach effect pattern) is more difficult to select. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A20, the out-of-change display mode is less likely to be selected in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. As described above, the variation display mode in which the variable display time (game time of the notification game) of a plurality of symbols is generally long is less likely to be selected in the first game state or the second game state, and thus the first game state is set. Can be easily set shorter than the second game state. In addition, since it is difficult to select the departure variation display mode in the first game state, it is possible to prevent unnecessary consumption of time for a notification game that is deviated in the first game state.

[Appendix A21]
A symbol display means (341) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) in the notification game (variable game);
In the notification game (fluctuating game), the symbols (decorative symbols) are displayed on the symbol display means (341), and the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determination means (41) is the special game (big hit). The first symbol combination (symbol combination of big hits) indicating that the game is to be shifted to (game), and the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) is applied to the special game (big hit game). Symbol control means (51) for stopping and displaying a second symbol combination (outlier symbol combination) indicating not to be shifted;
Further comprising
The symbol control means (51) performs the second symbol combination (outlier symbol combination) before the final stop symbol of the plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) is stopped and displayed at the end. From the variable display state (non-reach state) in which the stop display is clearly displayed, the stop change display in which the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol combination (a non-reachable symbol combination). The plurality of symbols can be variably displayed and stopped and displayed according to an aspect (completely deviated effect pattern),
The plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) when the plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in the off-variation display mode (completely off effect pattern) by the symbol control means (51). Wherein the average fluctuation display time (average fluctuation display time) is set shorter in the first game state (low probability mode) than in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any of supplementary notes A19.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A21, when the notification game is executed, the symbol control means shifts the plurality of symbols in the variable display mode and displays the symbols in the variable display mode and displays the average variation display time of the symbols in the first variation. The gaming state is set shorter than the second gaming state. Here, in the off-variation display mode, it is clearly indicated that the stop display is performed in the second symbol combination (out-of-design symbol combination) before the final stop symbol of the plurality of symbols that is stopped and displayed last is stopped and displayed. From the displayed variable display state, the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second symbol combination (outside symbol combination) is stopped and displayed. Since such an off-variation display mode is a fluctuating display mode that is easily selected from various types of fluctuating display modes, the average fluctuating display time of the off-variation display mode is greater in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. By being set shorter, the average fluctuation display time of the first game state can be easily set shorter than that of the second game state.

[Appendix A22]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (variable display time) of (variable game) is 75% or less of the average game time (average variable display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A15 to A20, wherein:

[Appendix A23]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (average fluctuation display time) of (variable game) is 50% or less of the average game time (average fluctuation display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A15 to A20, wherein:

[Appendix A24]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (average fluctuation display time) of (variable game) is 40% or less of the average game time (average fluctuation display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A15 to A20, wherein:

[Appendix A25]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (average fluctuation display time) of (variable game) is 30% or less of the average game time (average fluctuation display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A15 to A20, wherein:

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A22 to Supplementary Note A25, if the result of the shift determination does not indicate that the game should be shifted to the special game state, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is, for example, the notification game in the second game state. 75% or less, preferably 50% or less, more preferably 40% or less, even more preferably 30% or less of the average game time of the game. As described above, when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is within the above range with respect to the average game time of the notification game in the second game state. Therefore, when the result of the shift determination does not shift to the special game state, a significant difference is provided between the average game time in the first game state and the average game time in the second game state. be able to. Further, when the first game state or the second game state is ended by the transition determination of the upper limit number or the execution of the notification game, the first game state is ended with respect to a time required until the first game state is ended. There can be a clear difference in the time required. Therefore, when the player desires to prioritize a shorter average fluctuation display time over a higher transition determination probability, for example, when there is a restriction on the player's playing time, the request must be made surely. Can be satisfied.

[Appendix A26]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (variable display time) of (variable game) is 1% or more of the average game time (average variable display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A22 to A25, wherein:

[Appendix A27]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (average fluctuation display time) of (variable game) is at least 5% of the average game time (average fluctuation display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A22 to A25, wherein:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A26 and Supplementary Note A27, if the result of the transition determination does not indicate the transition to the special gaming state, the average gaming time of the informing game in the first gaming state is, for example, the informing game in the second gaming state. Is 1% or more of the average game time, and preferably 5% or more. As described above, when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is equal to the average game time of the notification game in the second game state. By being within the range, it is possible to prevent the average game time in the first game state from becoming extremely short when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the first gaming state caused by the notification game in the first gaming state being repeated in a short time is prevented.

[Appendix A28]
In the second game state (ST-probable game state), the degree of expectation that the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state (big hit game state), In the first game state (time-saving game state), the difference between the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determination means (41) and the expected degree at which the game is shifted to the special game state (big hit game state) is 30. %.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A28, the degree of expectation that the result of the shift determination in the second game state is to shift to the special game state, and the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means in the first game state is the special game state. The difference from the expected degree to be shifted is set to 30% or less. That is, the difference between the second game state and the first game state is set to have a small difference in the degree of expectation at which the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Thereby, even if the transition determination probability is shifted to the first game state lower than the second game state after the end of the special game, the disadvantage in the first game state based on the transition determination probability is reduced. .

[Appendix A29]
The state transition means (41) is provided after the end of the special game (big hit game) when a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364) is satisfied in the special game (big hit game). When the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the special game (big hit game), the first game state (time-saving game) is ended after the special game (big hit game) ends. The gaming machine according to attachment A28, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to (state).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A29, whether to shift to the first gaming state or the second gaming state after the end of the special game depends on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game. Therefore, in a special game that tends to be boring, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game by focusing on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A30]
The gaming machine according to attachment A29, wherein the predetermined condition is such that a player can select whether or not the condition is satisfied in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A30, it is possible to select whether a predetermined condition is satisfied or not in a special game according to a player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game according to the intention of the player, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the game time is limited, the player is less likely to make a transition to the special game state, but receives the transition judgment as much as possible by effectively utilizing the remaining game time. It is also possible to select the first game state in which the average game time of the notification game is short in accordance with the game time. Then, since the difference in the degree of expectation at which the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state is set to be small, the player can select the second game state having a short average game time of the notification game by himself / herself. Even in this case, the disadvantage in the second game state based on the transition determination probability is reduced.

[Appendix A31]
In the second gaming state (ST-probable gaming state), the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determining means (41) becomes the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the first gaming state. In the (time saving game state), the difference between the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determination means (41) and the expectation of the special game state (big hit game state) being set to 25% or less. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A28 to A30, characterized by the following features.

[Appendix A32]
In the second gaming state (ST-probable gaming state), the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determining means (41) becomes the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the first gaming state. In the (time saving game state), the difference between the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) and the expectation of the special game state (big hit game state) being set to 15% or less. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A28 to A30, characterized by the following features.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A29 to Supplementary Note A32, the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination in the second gaming state is to transition to the special gaming state, and the result of the transition determination by the transition determining unit in the first gaming state is special. The difference from the degree of expectation for shifting to the gaming state is set to preferably 25% or less, more preferably 15% or less. As described above, the difference between the degree of expectation of the transition to the special game state in the first game state and the degree of expectation of the transition to the special game state in the second game state is within the above range. Even when the transition to the second game state in which the transition determination probability is lower than the first game state after the end, the disadvantage in the second game state based on the transition determination probability is more reliably reduced.

[Appendix A33]
In the second gaming state (ST-probable gaming state), the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determining means (41) becomes the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the first gaming state. In the (time saving game state), the difference between the result of the transfer determination (big hit lottery) by the transfer determination means (41) and the degree of expectation for the special game state (big hit game state) is set to 1% or more. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A29 to A32, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:

[Appendix A34]
In the second gaming state (ST-probable gaming state), the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determining means (41) becomes the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the first gaming state. In the (time saving game state), the difference between the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determination means (41) and the expectation of the special game state (big hit game state) being set to 5% or more. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A29 to A32, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Notes A33 and A34, the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination in the second gaming state is to transition to the special gaming state, and the result of the transition determination by the transition determining unit in the first gaming state is special. The difference from the degree of expectation for shifting to the gaming state is set to, for example, 1% or more, preferably 5% or less. As described above, the difference between the degree of expectation of the transition to the special game state in the first game state and the degree of expectation of the transition to the special game state in the second game state is within the above range. Even when the transition to the second game state in which the transition determination probability is lower than the first game state after the end, the disadvantage in the second game state based on the transition determination probability is more reliably reduced.

[Appendix A35]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbols) of the second notification game (general figure game) is greater in the first game state (time-saving game state) than in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A6 to A14, which is set to be short.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A35, the average gaming time of the second notification game (the average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbols) is set shorter in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state, so that the first gaming state is achieved. In the state, the frequency or the probability that the predetermined area for giving an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passing of the game ball is set to the allowable state is higher than the second game state. Also in this case, more transition determinations can be received within the same time period than in the second game state, and more first notification games can be executed. Thereby, in a situation where the game time is restricted, more transition determinations can be received and more first notification games can be executed within the same time than in the second game state.

[Appendix A36]
The state transition means (41) is provided after the end of the special game (big hit game) when a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364) is satisfied in the special game (big hit game). When the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the special game (big hit game), the first game state (time-saving game) is ended after the special game (big hit game) ends. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A35, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to (State).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A36, whether to shift to the first gaming state or the second gaming state after the end of the special game depends on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game. Therefore, in a special game that tends to be boring, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game by focusing on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A37]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A36, wherein the predetermined condition is such that a player can select whether or not the condition is satisfied in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A37, whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied can be selected by a player's intention in a special game. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game according to the intention of the player, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the game time is restricted, the transition determination probability to the special game state is reduced when the game time is limited, but the remaining game time is effectively utilized to receive as many transition determinations as possible, so that the player is left. The average game time of the first notification game and the second notification game is short according to the game time, and the first game state can be selected by the user's own intention.

[Appendix A38]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A35 to A37, wherein the gaming time is 75% or less of an average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game).

[Appendix A39]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A35 to A37, wherein the gaming time is 50% or less of an average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game).

[Appendix A40]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A35 to A37, wherein the gaming time is equal to or less than 40% of an average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (regular game).

[Appendix A41]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A35 to A37, wherein the gaming time is not more than 30% of an average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A38 to A41, the average game time of the second notification game in the first game state is, for example, 75% or less of the average game time of the second notification game in the second game state, and is preferably Is 50% or less, more preferably 40% or less, and still more preferably 30% or less. As described above, since the average game time of the second notification game in the first game state is within the above range with respect to the average game time of the second notification game in the second game state, the determination condition is determined by the passage of the game ball. Can be provided with a significant difference between the first game state and the second game state with respect to the frequency at which the predetermined area for giving the opportunity to establish is set to the allowable state. Thereby, in the first game state, more transition determinations can be received within the same time than in the second game state, and more first notification games can be executed. Further, when the first gaming state or the second gaming state is ended by the determination of the transition of the upper limit number or the execution of the first notification game, the first gaming state is ended for the time required until the first gaming state is ended. There can be a clear difference in the time it takes to complete. Therefore, when the player desires to prioritize a shorter average fluctuation display time over a higher transition determination probability, for example, when there is a restriction on the player's playing time, the request must be made surely. Can be satisfied.

[Appendix A42]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A38 to A41, wherein the gaming time is 1% or more of the average game time (average fluctuation display time of ordinary symbols) of the two notification games (general figure games).

[Appendix A43]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A38 to A41, wherein the average playing time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the two notification games (normal figure game) is 5% or more.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A42 and Supplementary Note A43, the average game time of the second notification game in the first game state is, for example, 1% or more of the average game time of the second notification game in the second game state, and is preferably Is 5% or more. As described above, since the average game time of the second notification game in the first game state is within the above range with respect to the average game time of the second notification game in the second game state, the second game in the first game state It is prevented that the average game time of the two notification games becomes extremely short.

[Appendix B1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determination means (41);
A restricted state that restricts the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area (315) that gives an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball, and an allowable state that allows the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area (315) An electric accessory (315b) for switching between
After the end of the special game (big hit game mode), the state is shifted to a first state (high frequency support mode) in which the frequency or probability of switching to the allowable state is high, and an upper limit number (for example, in the first state (high frequency support mode)) 90) when the transition determination (big hit lottery) or the notification game (fluctuating game) is executed, the frequency or probability of switching to the allowable state is lower than the first state (high frequency support mode). State shifting means (41) for shifting to a state (low-frequency support mode);
With
The first state (high-frequency support mode) is a state in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is the first gaming state (a time-saving gaming state that is the low-probability mode) and the transition to the special gaming state. The second game state (ST probable change game state which is the high probability mode) in which the transition determination probability becomes higher than the first game state (the low probability mode),
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is set shorter in the first game state (time-saving game state) than in the second game state (ST sure change game state). A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, after the end of the special game, the frequency or probability that the game ball is switched to the allowable state in which the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is given to give an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball is high. The state is shifted to the first state. That is, after the end of the special game, the game state is shifted to the first game state which is advantageous to the player who easily passes the game ball to the predetermined area and easily performs the shift determination (notification game). Therefore, it is expected that the upper limit number of notification games will be executed in a short time until the first state is ended, and as a result, the special game will be executed in a short time after the end of the special game. The first state shifted after the end of the special game is a first game state in which the average game time of the notification game is short while the transition determination probability to the special game state is low, and the notification game in which the transition determination probability is high. The second game state includes a long average game time. That is, after the end of the special game, a transition is made to the first state which is advantageous to the player who is likely to execute the transition determination, and the first state is changed to two game states having opposing characteristics with respect to the transition determination probability and the average game time. Since the game state is included, the player is interested in which game state the game state is shifted to, thereby improving the playability.

  Here, in the first game state, since the average game time of the notification game is shorter than in the second game state, more transition judgments are made in the same time than in the second game state, and more notification games are performed. Has the advantage of being performed. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the transition determination probability is higher than in the first gaming state, and there is an advantage that the transition to the special gaming state is easier than in the first gaming state.

  As described above, the first game state and the second game state have respective advantages, but many players desire to shift to the second game state in which the special game state is easily shifted after the special game state ends. Then, the player does not wish to be shifted to the first game state. However, when playing a game in a game hall, the user may encounter a situation in which the game time is limited, such as when the time until the game hall closes is short, or when the time until the store closes is short due to use or the like. In this case, some players may wish to receive more transition determinations and perform more notification games in the same time period than in the second game state. In such a situation, the first game state that is disliked by many players may be desired, so that it is possible to meet the needs of the players whose remaining game time is limited.

[Appendix B2]
The state transition means (41) is provided after the end of the special game (big hit game) when a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364) is satisfied in the special game (big hit game). When the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the special game (big hit game), the first game state (time-saving game) is ended after the special game (big hit game) ends. State), the gaming machine according to supplementary note B1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B2, whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game depends on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game. Therefore, in a special game that tends to be boring, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game by focusing on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B3]
The gaming machine according to appendix B2, wherein the success or failure of the predetermined condition is selectable by a player in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B3, it is possible to select whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a special game by a player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game according to the intention of the player, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the game time is limited, the player is less likely to make a transition to the special game state, but receives the transition judgment as much as possible by effectively utilizing the remaining game time. It is also possible to select the first game state in which the average game time of the notification game is short in accordance with the game time.

[Appendix B4]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B3, wherein the average playing time of the (fluctuating game) is 75% or less of the average playing time (the average fluctuating display time of the special symbol).

[Appendix B5]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B3, wherein the average playing time of the (fluctuating game) is 50% or less of the average game time (the average fluctuating display time of the special symbol).

[Appendix B6]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B3, wherein the average playing time of the (fluctuating game) is 40% or less of the average playing time (the average fluctuating display time of the special symbol).

[Appendix B7]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B3, wherein the gaming time is 30% or less of an average game time (variable game) (average fluctuation display time of special symbols).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes B4 to B7, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is, for example, 75% or less, preferably 50% or less of the average game time of the notification game in the second game state. And more preferably 40% or less, and still more preferably 30% or less. As described above, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is in the above range with respect to the average game time of the notification game in the second game state, so that the average game time in the first game state is: A significant difference can be provided for the average game time in the second game state. Further, when the first game state or the second game state is ended by the transition determination of the upper limit number or the execution of the notification game, the first game state is ended with respect to a time required until the first game state is ended. There can be a clear difference in the time required. Therefore, when the player desires to prioritize a shorter average fluctuation display time over a higher transition determination probability, for example, when there is a restriction on the player's playing time, the request must be made surely. Can be satisfied.

[Appendix B8]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B4 to B7, wherein the average playing time of the (fluctuating game) is 1% or more of the average playing time (the average fluctuating display time of the special symbol).

[Appendix B9]
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) in the first game state (time-saving game state) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is the notification game in the second game state (ST sure change game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B4 to B7, wherein the average playing time of the (fluctuating game) is 5% or more of the average playing time (the average fluctuating display time of the special symbol).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes B8 and B9, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is, for example, 1% or more of the average game time of the notification game in the second game state, and preferably 5% or more. It is. As described above, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is in the above range with respect to the average game time of the notification game in the second game state, so that the average game time in the first game state is extremely high. It is prevented from becoming too short. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the first gaming state caused by the notification game in the first gaming state being repeated in a short time is prevented.

[Appendix C1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
After the end of the special game (big hit game), the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) is changed to the first game state (low probability mode) or the special game state (big hit game state). State transition means (41) for transitioning to a second game state (high probability mode) in which a transition determination probability (big hit probability) to be shifted is higher than the first game state (low probability mode);
Notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determination means (41);
With
The notification game (fluctuating game) when the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) is not to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) (when the lottery result is out of order). The average game time (average fluctuation display time of special symbols) is set shorter in the first game state (low probability mode) than in the second game state (high probability mode). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C1, after the end of the special game, the average game time of the notification game is short when the transition determination probability to the special game state is low and the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special game state. The game state is shifted to the second game state in which one game state or the average game time of the notification game is long in the case where the shift determination probability is high and the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. In other words, after the end of the special game, the game is shifted to one of two game states having conflicting characteristics with respect to the shift determination probability and the average game time when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, the player is interested in which game state is to be shifted to, thereby improving the playability.

  Here, the first game state is shorter than the second game state because the average game time of the notification game is shorter when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. There is an advantage that more transition games are received and more notification games are executed compared to the state. In particular, the deviation determination probability that the result of the shift determination is determined not to be shifted to the special game state is significantly lower than the shift determination probability that the result of the shift determination is shifted to the special game state, and most of the results of the shift determination are special. The game state is not shifted. Therefore, in the first game state, the average game time of the notification game in the case where the result of the transition determination is not the transition to the special game state is set to be short, so that the average of the notification game in the first game state with respect to the entirety is set. It is possible to effectively shorten the game time, receive more transition determinations than in the second game state within the same time, and execute more notification games. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the transition determination probability is higher than in the first gaming state, and there is an advantage that the transition to the special gaming state is easier than in the first gaming state.

  As described above, the first game state and the second game state have respective advantages, but many players desire to shift to the second game state in which the special game state is easily shifted after the special game state ends. Then, the player does not wish to be shifted to the first game state. However, when playing a game in a game hall, the user may encounter a situation in which the game time is limited, such as when the time until the game hall closes is short, or when the time until the store closes is short due to use or the like. In this case, some players may wish to receive more transition determinations and perform more notification games in the same time period than in the second game state. In such a situation, the first game state disliked by many players may be desired first, so that it is possible to meet the needs of players whose remaining game time is limited.

[Appendix C2]
The state transition means (41) is provided after the end of the special game (big hit game) when a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364) is satisfied in the special game (big hit game). The state is shifted to the second game state (high probability mode), and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the special game (big hit game), the first game state (low probability mode) after the end of the special game (big hit game) ), The gaming machine according to supplementary note C1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C2, whether to shift to the first gaming state or the second gaming state after the end of the special game depends on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game. Therefore, in a special game that tends to be boring, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game by focusing on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C2, wherein the success or failure of the predetermined condition is selectable by a player in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C3, it is possible to select whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a special game by a player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game according to the intention of the player, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the game time is limited, the player is less likely to make a transition to the special game state, but receives the transition judgment as much as possible by effectively utilizing the remaining game time. It is also possible to select the first game state in which the average game time of the notification game is short in accordance with the game time.

[Appendix C4]
A restricted state that restricts the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area (315) that gives an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball, and an allowable state that allows the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area (315) And an electric accessory (315b) for switching between
The first gaming state (low-probability mode) and the second gaming state (high-probability mode) are in a first state (high-frequency support mode) in which the frequency or probability of being switched to the allowable state by the electric accessory (315b) is high. Time saving game state or ST probable game state)
The state shifting means (41) shifts to the first state (high frequency support mode) after the end of the special game (big hit game), and in the first state (high frequency support mode), the upper limit number (for example, 90) When the shift determination (big hit lottery) or the notification game (fluctuating game) is executed, the frequency or the probability of being switched to the allowable state by the electric accessory (315b) is the first state (high frequency support mode). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes C1 to C3, wherein the game machine is shifted to a second state lower than the second state (a normal state that is a low-frequency support mode).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C4, after the end of the special game, the frequency or the probability of switching to the allowable state in which the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area to give an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball is high is high. The game is shifted to the first game. That is, in the first game, the frequency with which the game ball passes through the predetermined area is increased, so that the frequency of occurrence of the non-game period in which the notification game is not executed is reduced, and the non-game period is generated even when the non-game period occurs. Is shortened. Therefore, in the first game, as compared with the second state in which the frequency or the probability of switching to the allowable state in which the passing of the game ball in the predetermined area is allowed is lower, the number of the transition determination or the notification game executed per unit time is smaller. More. Thereby, after the end of the special game, the time until the transition determination of the upper limit number or the notification game is executed is shortened by shifting to the first state, so that the first state is the first game state. In this case, the first state can be completed in a shorter time.

[Appendix C5]
A symbol display means (341) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) in the notification game (variable game);
In the notification game (fluctuating game), the symbols (decorative symbols) are displayed on the symbol display means (341), and the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determination means (41) is the special game (big hit). The first symbol combination (symbol combination of big hits) indicating that the game is to be shifted to (game), and the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) is applied to the special game (big hit game). Symbol control means (51) for stopping and displaying a second symbol combination (outlier symbol combination) indicating not to be shifted;
Further comprising
The symbol control means (51) controls the first symbol combination (big hit symbol combination) and the final symbol until the last stop symbol of the plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) is stopped and displayed. From the variable display state (reach state) in which it is impossible to determine which of the second symbol combinations (outcoming symbol combinations) is to be stopped and displayed, the last symbol is stopped and displayed so that the second symbol combination (outcoming symbols) is stopped. The plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) can be displayed in a variable and stopped manner by an off-variation display mode (reach out-of-reach effect pattern) which is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination.
The plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) when the symbols (three decorative symbols) are fluctuated and stopped in the deviation variation display mode (reach deviating effect pattern) by the symbol control means (51). The average fluctuation display time (average fluctuation display time) is set shorter in the first game state (low probability mode) than in the second game state (high probability mode). A gaming machine according to any of supplementary notes C4.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C5, when the notification game is executed, the symbol control means shifts the plurality of symbols in the variable display mode and displays the symbols in the variable display mode. The gaming state is set shorter than the second gaming state. Here, in the deviation variation display mode, the first symbol combination (big hit symbol combination) and the second symbol combination (missing symbol combination) are displayed until the last stop symbol of the plurality of symbols that is stopped and displayed last is stopped and displayed. ), The final stop symbol is stopped and displayed from the variable display state (reach state) where it is impossible to determine which of the symbols is stopped and displayed, and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol combination (out of symbol combination). In such a deviation variation display mode, the variation display time of a plurality of symbols (game time of the notification game) is generally long, so that the average variation display time of the deviation variation display mode is greater in the first game state than in the second game state. Is also set to be shorter, it is possible to easily set the average fluctuation display time of the first gaming state shorter than that of the second gaming state. In addition, by setting the variable display time of the plurality of symbols in the deviation variation display mode in the first game state to be short, unnecessary time is consumed for the notification game that is deviation in the first game state. Is prevented.

[Appendix C6]
The out-of-place variation display mode (out-of-reach effect pattern) is characterized in that the first game state (low-probability mode) is more difficult to select than the second game state (high-probability mode). Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C6, the out-of-change display mode is less likely to be selected in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. As described above, the variation display mode in which the variable display time (game time of the notification game) of a plurality of symbols is generally long is less likely to be selected in the first game state or the second game state, and thus the first game state is set. Can be easily set shorter than the second game state. In addition, since it is difficult to select the departure variation display mode in the first game state, it is possible to prevent unnecessary consumption of time for a notification game that is deviated in the first game state.

[Appendix C7]
A symbol display means (341) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) in the notification game (variable game);
In the notification game (fluctuating game), the symbols (decorative symbols) are displayed on the symbol display means (341), and the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determination means (41) is the special game (big hit). The first symbol combination (symbol combination of big hits) indicating that the game is to be shifted to (game), and the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) is applied to the special game (big hit game). Symbol control means (51) for stopping and displaying a second symbol combination (outlier symbol combination) indicating not to be shifted;
Further comprising
The symbol control means (51) performs the second symbol combination (outlier symbol combination) before the final stop symbol of the plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) is stopped and displayed at the end. From the variable display state (non-reach state) in which the stop display is clearly displayed, the stop change display in which the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol combination (a non-reachable symbol combination). The plurality of symbols can be variably displayed and stopped and displayed according to an aspect (completely deviated effect pattern),
The plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) when the plurality of symbols (three decorative symbols) are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in the off-variation display mode (completely off effect pattern) by the symbol control means (51). The average fluctuation display time (average fluctuation display time) is set shorter in the first game state (low probability mode) than in the second game state (high probability mode). A gaming machine according to any of supplementary notes C6.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C7, when the notification game is executed, the symbol control means changes the average display time of the plurality of symbols when the plurality of symbols are displayed in the variable display mode and the variable display is stopped. The gaming state is set shorter than the second gaming state. Here, in the off-variation display mode, it is clearly indicated that the stop display is performed in the second symbol combination (out-of-design symbol combination) before the final stop symbol of the plurality of symbols that is stopped and displayed last is stopped and displayed. From the displayed variable display state, the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second symbol combination (outside symbol combination) is stopped and displayed. Since such an off-variation display mode is a fluctuating display mode that is easily selected from various types of fluctuating display modes, the average fluctuating display time of the off-variation display mode is greater in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. By being set shorter, the average fluctuation display time of the first game state can be easily set shorter than that of the second game state.

[Appendix C8]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (variable display time) of (variable game) is 75% or less of the average game time (average variable display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

[Appendix C9]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (average fluctuation display time) of (variable game) is 50% or less of the average game time (average fluctuation display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

[Appendix C10]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (average fluctuation display time) of (variable game) is 40% or less of the average game time (average fluctuation display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

[Appendix C11]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (average fluctuation display time) of (variable game) is 30% or less of the average game time (average fluctuation display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C8 to Supplementary Note C11, if the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special gaming state, the average gaming time of the informing game in the first gaming state is, for example, the informing game in the second gaming state. 75% or less, preferably 50% or less, more preferably 40% or less, even more preferably 30% or less of the average game time of the game. As described above, when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is within the above range with respect to the average game time of the notification game in the second game state. Therefore, when the result of the shift determination does not shift to the special game state, a significant difference is provided between the average game time in the first game state and the average game time in the second game state. be able to. Further, when the first game state or the second game state is ended by the transition determination of the upper limit number or the execution of the notification game, the first game state is ended with respect to a time required until the first game state is ended. There can be a clear difference in the time required. Therefore, when the player desires to prioritize a shorter average fluctuation display time over a higher transition determination probability, for example, when there is a restriction on the player's playing time, the request must be made surely. Can be satisfied.

[Appendix C12]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (variable display time) of (variable game) is 1% or more of the average game time (average variable display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C8 to C11, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

[Appendix C13]
If the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game state), the notification game in the first game state (low probability mode). The average game time (average fluctuation display time) of (variable game) is at least 5% of the average game time (average fluctuation display time) of the notification game (variable game) in the second game state (high probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C8 to C11, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C12 and Supplementary Note C13, if the result of the transition determination is not to shift to the special gaming state, the average gaming time of the informing game in the first gaming state is, for example, the informing game in the second gaming state. Is 1% or more of the average game time, and preferably 5% or more. As described above, when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state, the average game time of the notification game in the first game state is equal to the average game time of the notification game in the second game state. By being within the range, it is possible to prevent the average game time in the first game state from becoming extremely short when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the first gaming state caused by the notification game in the first gaming state being repeated in a short time is prevented.

[Appendix D1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determination means (41);
A restricted state that restricts the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area (315) that gives an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball, and an allowable state that allows the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area (315) An electric accessory (315b) for switching between
After the end of the special game (big hit game state), the first state (high frequency) is shifted to a first state (high frequency support mode) in which the frequency or probability of being switched to the allowable state by the electric accessory (315b) is high. In the support mode), the frequency or the probability of being switched to the allowable state by the electric accessory (315b) when the shift determination (big hit lottery) or the notification game (fluctuating game) of the upper limit number (for example, 90) is executed. State transition means (41) for transitioning to a second state (low frequency support mode) lower than the first state (high frequency support mode);
With
The first state (high-frequency support mode) includes a first game state (a time-saving game state in the low-probability mode), and a result of the shift determination by the shift determination unit (41) shifting to the special game state. The second game state (ST probability changing game state of the high probability mode) in which the probability of the second game state is higher than the first game state (the time reduction game state);
The average game time of the notification game (variable game) (the average fluctuation display time of the special symbol) is set shorter in the first game state (time-saving game state) than in the second game state (ST sure change game state). ,
In the second game state (ST-probable game state), the degree of expectation that the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state (big hit game state), In the first game state (time-saving game state), the difference between the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determination means (41) and the expected degree at which the game is shifted to the special game state (big hit game state) is 30. %.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, after the end of the special game, the frequency or the probability of switching to the allowable state in which the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area in which an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball is given is high. The state is shifted to the first state. That is, after the end of the special game, the game state is shifted to the first game state which is advantageous to the player who easily passes the game ball to the predetermined area and easily performs the shift determination (notification game). Therefore, it is expected that the upper limit number of notification games will be executed in a short time until the first state is ended, and as a result, the special game will be executed in a short time after the end of the special game. The first state shifted after the end of the special game is a first game state in which the average game time of the notification game is short while the transition determination probability to the special game state is low, and the notification game in which the transition determination probability is high. The second game state includes a long average game time. That is, after the end of the special game, a transition is made to the first state which is advantageous to the player who is likely to execute the transition determination, and the first state is changed to two game states having opposing characteristics with respect to the transition determination probability and the average game time. Since the game state is included, the player is interested in which game state the game state is shifted to, thereby improving the playability.

  Here, in the first game state, since the average game time of the notification game is shorter than in the second game state, more transition judgments are made in the same time than in the second game state, and more notification games are performed. Has the advantage of being performed. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the transition determination probability is higher than in the first gaming state, and there is an advantage that the transition to the special gaming state is easier than in the first gaming state.

  As described above, the first game state and the second game state have respective advantages, but many players desire to shift to the second game state in which the special game state is easily shifted after the special game state ends. Then, the player does not wish to be shifted to the first game state. However, when playing a game in a game hall, the user may encounter a situation in which the game time is limited, such as when the time until the game hall closes is short, or when the time until the store closes is short due to use or the like. In this case, some players may wish to receive more transition determinations and perform more notification games in the same time period than in the second game state. In such a situation, the first game state that is disliked by many players may be desired, so that it is possible to meet the needs of the players whose remaining game time is limited.

  Further, the degree of expectation that the result of the shift determination in the second game state is to shift to the special game state, and the expectation that the result of the shift determination by the shift determination means in the first game state is to shift to the special game state. The difference from the degree is set to 30% or less. That is, the difference between the second game state and the first game state is set to have a small difference in the degree of expectation at which the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Thereby, even if the transition determination probability is shifted to the first game state lower than the second game state after the end of the special game, the disadvantage in the first game state based on the transition determination probability is reduced. .

[Appendix D2]
The state transition means (41) is provided after the end of the special game (big hit game) when a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364) is satisfied in the special game (big hit game). When the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the special game (big hit game), the first game state (time-saving game) is ended after the special game (big hit game) ends. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to (state).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2, whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game depends on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game. Therefore, in a special game that tends to be boring, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game by focusing on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2, wherein the predetermined condition is such that a player can select whether the condition is satisfied or not in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D3, it is possible to select whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a special game according to a player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game according to the intention of the player, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the game time is limited, the player is less likely to make a transition to the special game state, but receives the transition judgment as much as possible by effectively utilizing the remaining game time. It is also possible to select the first game state in which the average game time of the notification game is short in accordance with the game time. Then, since the difference in the degree of expectation at which the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state is set to be small, the player can select the second game state having a short average game time of the notification game by himself / herself. Even in this case, the disadvantage in the second game state based on the transition determination probability is reduced.

[Appendix D4]
In the second gaming state (ST-probable gaming state), the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determining means (41) becomes the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the first gaming state. In the (time saving game state), the difference between the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determination means (41) and the expectation of the special game state (big hit game state) being set to 25% or less. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes D1 to D3, characterized in that:

[Appendix D5]
In the second gaming state (ST-probable gaming state), the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determining means (41) becomes the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the first gaming state. In the (time saving game state), the difference between the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determining means (41) and the expectation of the special game state (big hit game state) being set to 15% or less. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes D1 to D3, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes D4 and D5, the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination in the second game state is to shift to the special game state, and the result of the transition determination by the transition determination unit in the first game state is special. The difference from the degree of expectation for shifting to the gaming state is set to preferably 25% or less, more preferably 15% or less. As described above, the difference between the degree of expectation of the transition to the special game state in the first game state and the degree of expectation of the transition to the special game state in the second game state is within the above range. Even when the transition to the second game state in which the transition determination probability is lower than the first game state after the end, the disadvantage in the second game state based on the transition determination probability is more reliably reduced.

[Appendix D6]
In the second gaming state (ST-probable gaming state), the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determining means (41) becomes the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the first gaming state. In the (time saving game state), the difference between the result of the transfer determination (big hit lottery) by the transfer determination means (41) and the degree of expectation for the special game state (big hit game state) is set to 1% or more. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes D1 to D5, characterized in that:

[Appendix D7]
In the second gaming state (ST-probable gaming state), the result of the transition determination (big hit lottery) by the transition determining means (41) becomes the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the first gaming state. In the (time saving game state), the difference between the result of the shift determination (big hit lottery) by the shift determination means (41) and the expectation of the special game state (big hit game state) being set to 5% or more. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes D1 to D5, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D6 and Supplementary Note D, the result of the transition determination in the second game state is expected to be shifted to the special game state, and the result of the transition determination by the transition determination unit in the first game state is special. The difference from the degree of expectation for shifting to the gaming state is set to, for example, 1% or more, preferably 5% or less. As described above, the difference between the degree of expectation of the transition to the special game state in the first game state and the degree of expectation of the transition to the special game state in the second game state is within the above range. Even when the transition to the second game state in which the transition determination probability is lower than the first game state after the end, the disadvantage in the second game state based on the transition determination probability is more reliably reduced.

[Appendix E1]
Based on the establishment of the first determination condition, a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game (a jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed. Means (41);
First notification game execution means (41) for executing a first notification game (variable game) for notifying a result of the transfer determination (big hit lottery) by the transfer determination means (41);
A restricted state that restricts the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area (315) that gives an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball, and an allowable state that allows the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area (315) An electric accessory (315b) for switching between
A switch determination unit (41) that performs a switch determination (lottery per ordinary drawing) as to whether or not to switch the electric accessory (315b) to the allowable state based on the establishment of a second determination condition;
A second notification game execution means (41) for executing a second notification game (general drawing game) for notifying the result of the switching determination (lot drawing per general figure) by the switching determination means (41);
After the end of the special game (big hit game state), the first state (high frequency) is shifted to a first state (high frequency support mode) in which the frequency or probability of being switched to the allowable state by the electric accessory (315b) is high. In the support mode), when the shift determination (big hit lottery) of the upper limit number (for example, 90) or the first notification game (fluctuating game) is executed, the frequency of switching to the permissible state by the electric accessory (315b). Or state transition means (41) for transitioning to a second state (low-frequency support mode) having a lower probability than the first state (high-frequency support mode);
With
The first state (high-frequency support mode) includes a first game state (a time-saving game state in the low-probability mode), and a result of the shift determination by the shift determination unit (41) shifting to the special game state. The second game state (ST probability changing game state in the high probability mode) in which the transition determination probability is higher than the first game state (time saving game state),
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of special symbols) of the first notification game (variable game) is shorter in the first game state (time-saving game state) than in the second game state (ST-probable game state). Is set,
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbols) of the second notification game (general figure game) is greater in the first game state (time-saving game state) than in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). A gaming machine characterized by being set short.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary note E1, after the end of the special game, the frequency or the probability that the game ball is switched to the allowable state in which the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area where the opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball is given is high. The state is shifted to the first state. That is, after the end of the special game, the game state is shifted to the first game state which is advantageous to the player who easily passes the game ball to the predetermined area and easily performs the shift determination (first notification game). Therefore, it is expected that the upper limit number of first notification games is executed in a short time until the first state is ended, and as a result, the special game is executed in a short time after the end of the special game. Further, the first state shifted after the end of the special game is a first game state in which the average game time of the first notification game is short while the shift determination probability to the special game state is low, and the shift determination probability is high. It includes a second game state in which the average game time of the first notification game is long. That is, after the end of the special game, a transition is made to the first state which is advantageous to the player who is likely to execute the transition determination, and the first state is changed to two game states having opposing characteristics with respect to the transition determination probability and the average game time. Since the game state is included, the player is interested in which game state the game state is shifted to, thereby improving the playability.

  Here, since the first game state has a shorter average game time of the first notification game than the second game state, the first game state receives more transition determinations than the second game state within the same time, and A notification game can be executed. Furthermore, since the average game time of the second notification game (the average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbols) is set shorter in the first game state than in the second game state, the game balls in the first game state are not played. The frequency or probability that the predetermined area for giving an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by passing is set to the allowable state is higher than the second gaming state. Also in this case, more transition determinations can be received within the same time period than in the second game state, and more first notification games can be executed.

  On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the transition determination probability is higher than in the first gaming state, and there is an advantage that the transition to the special gaming state is easier than in the first gaming state.

  As described above, the first game state and the second game state have respective advantages, but many players desire to shift to the second game state in which the special game state is easily shifted after the special game state ends. Then, the player does not wish to be shifted to the first game state. However, when playing a game in a game hall, the user may encounter a situation in which the game time is limited, such as when the time until the game hall closes is short, or when the time until the store closes is short due to use or the like. In this case, some players may wish to receive more transition determinations and perform more first notification games in the same time than in the second game state. In such a situation, the first game state that is disliked by many players may be desired, so that it is possible to meet the needs of the players whose remaining game time is limited.

[Appendix E2]
The state transition means (41) is provided after the end of the special game (big hit game) when a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 364) is satisfied in the special game (big hit game). When the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the special game (big hit game), the first game state (time-saving game) is ended after the special game (big hit game) ends. (Each state).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E2, whether to shift to the first gaming state or the second gaming state after the end of the special game depends on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game. Therefore, in a special game that tends to be boring, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game by focusing on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E2, wherein the predetermined condition is such that a player can select whether or not the condition is satisfied in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E3, whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied can be selected by a player's intention in a special game. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to shift to the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game according to the intention of the player, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the game time is restricted, the transition determination probability to the special game state is reduced when the game time is limited, but the remaining game time is effectively utilized to receive as many transition determinations as possible, so that the player is left. The average game time of the first notification game and the second notification game is short according to the game time, and the first game state can be selected by the user's own intention.

[Appendix E4]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes E1 to E3, wherein the gaming time is 75% or less of an average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game).

[Appendix E5]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E3, wherein the gaming time is 50% or less of an average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game).

[Appendix E6]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, wherein the gaming time is 40% or less of the average game time (average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbols) of the second notification game (general figure game).

[Appendix E7]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Notes E1 to E3, wherein the gaming time is 30% or less of the average game time (average fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbols) of the two notification games (general figure games).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes E4 to E7, the average game time of the second notification game in the first game state is, for example, 75% or less of the average game time of the second notification game in the second game state, and is preferably Is 50% or less, more preferably 40% or less, and still more preferably 30% or less. As described above, since the average game time of the second notification game in the first game state is within the above range with respect to the average game time of the second notification game in the second game state, the determination condition is determined by the passage of the game ball. Can be provided with a significant difference between the first game state and the second game state with respect to the frequency at which the predetermined area for giving the opportunity to establish is set to the allowable state. Thereby, in the first game state, more transition determinations can be received within the same time than in the second game state, and more first notification games can be executed. Further, when the first gaming state or the second gaming state is ended by the determination of the transition of the upper limit number or the execution of the first notification game, the first gaming state is ended for the time required until the first gaming state is ended. There can be a clear difference in the time it takes to complete. Therefore, when the player desires to prioritize a shorter average fluctuation display time over a higher transition determination probability, for example, when there is a restriction on the player's playing time, the request must be made surely. Can be satisfied.

[Appendix E8]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes E4 to E7, wherein the gaming time is 1% or more of an average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game).

[Appendix E9]
The average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game) in the first game state (time saving game state) is the second game state in the second game state (ST certain variation game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes E4 to E7, wherein the game time is 5% or more of an average game time (average fluctuation display time of a normal symbol) of the second notification game (general figure game).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes E8 and E9, the average game time of the second notification game in the first game state is, for example, 1% or more of the average game time of the second notification game in the second game state, and is preferably Is 5% or more. As described above, since the average game time of the second notification game in the first game state is within the above range with respect to the average game time of the second notification game in the second game state, the second game in the first game state It is prevented that the average game time of the two notification games becomes extremely short.

[Appendix F1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41);
A first lottery state (high-probability mode) in which a transition determination probability (big hit probability) at which a result of the transition determination makes a transition to the special game state (big hit game) is a first transition determination probability; and the transfer determination probability A lottery state determining means (41) for determining which of a second lottery state (low probability mode) in which the (big hit probability) is lower than the first shift determination probability;
Notification game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of the notification game when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41);
With
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41), a predetermined time is determined as a game time of the notification game,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination unit (41), a specific time shorter than a predetermined time is determined as the game time of the notification game. Gaming machine to do.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, as the lottery state in which the transition determination is performed, the transition determination probability is high, the first lottery state in which the game time of the notification game is executed for a predetermined time is long, and the transition determination probability is low and the notification game is in the predetermined state. And a second lottery state executed in a specific time shorter than the time. The first lottery state is advantageous to the player in that the transition determination probability is high, but since the game time of the notification game is long, the number of executions of the notification game per unit time is reduced. On the other hand, the second lottery state is disadvantageous to the player in that the transition determination probability is low, but the number of executions of the notification game per unit time increases because the game time of the notification game is short. Thus, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have different characteristics in the transition determination probability and the game time of the notification game. Therefore, by including the first lottery state and the second lottery state having different characteristics in the transition determination probability and the game time of the notification game as the lottery state for performing the transition determination, a gaming machine having a new gaming property is provided. .

[Appendix F2]
The first lottery state (high-probability mode) has an expected amount of bonuses (big-hit expected value, outgoing value) obtained as a result of the execution of the same number of times of the shift determination as compared to the second lottery state (low-probability mode). The gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, wherein the expected value of the ball is large.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F2, the expected amount of the privilege (small jackpot expected value, expected ball-out value) obtained in the first lottery state as a result of the execution of the shift determination of the same number of times as compared with the second lottery state is larger than that of the second lottery state. large. Therefore, the first lottery state and the second lottery state not only have different transition determination probabilities, but also have a different expected amount of privilege obtained as a result of performing the same number of transition determinations. Accordingly, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a further difference, so that a gaming machine having further novel gaming properties is provided.

[Appendix F3]
After the end of the special game (big hit game), further provided is a lottery state transition means (41) for transitioning to one of the first lottery state (high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode),
The lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the second lottery state after the end of the special game when a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game, and the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or F2, wherein the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special game when not performed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F3, when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game, the game is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special game, and when the specific condition is not satisfied during execution of the special game, After the end, the state is shifted to the first lottery state. As described above, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game, the state is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special game. By shifting to the lottery state, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game while paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game.

[Appendix F4]
The gaming machine according to claim F3, wherein the player can select whether or not to satisfy the specific condition in the special game.

  By the way, there is a case where the surely changing game state continues until the game hall is closed, and the user is forced to leave the game hall in the surely changing game state. In addition, the player may have a limited game time due to the use of the game, and may have a certain-variable game state at his or her scheduled closing time. In other words, in a situation where there is a time constraint between the closing time of the game hall and the scheduled closing time of the game hall, a situation may occur in which it is necessary to leave the shop in the probable change game state. When such a situation is expected to occur, if a sufficient game time can be secured, more balls may be obtained, and thus there is a tendency that it is not desired to end the game in the probable game state. Further, the player desires to execute the notification game as many times as possible in a short time as much as possible within the range of the remaining game time, and eventually to execute the big hit game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note F4, the player can select whether or not to satisfy a specific condition in a special game. As described above, the player can select whether or not to satisfy the specific condition in the special game, so that the player can obtain a privilege (payout ball) obtained by executing the special game rather than the notification game time (number of times). When the priority is given, the special condition is established in the special game state, and when the priority (payout) obtained by executing the special game is prioritized, the specific condition is established in the special game state, and the execution of the special game is selected. In the case where the notification game time (number of times) is prioritized over the privilege (payout) obtained by the above, it is possible to select that the specific condition is not satisfied. This makes it possible to select a lottery state according to the situation and intention of the player, including the case where there is a time constraint of the player.

[Appendix F5]
The second transition determination probability (big hit probability in the low probability mode) includes a plurality of different transition determination probabilities,
The supplementary note F1 wherein the first transition determination probability (big hit probability in the high probability mode) is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. To A4.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F5, the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among a plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. As described above, since the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability, the transition determination probability in the first lottery state is set to the second transition determination probability. The transition determination probability in the lottery state can be reliably increased. This makes it possible to reliably make a difference between the first lottery state and the second lottery state with respect to the transition determination probability, and to make a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. Can be improved, so that the playability is improved.

[Appendix F6]
At least one of the predetermined time and the specific time includes a plurality of game times, and a maximum time (time saving) of the specific time is shorter than a minimum time of the predetermined time. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F6, the maximum time of the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transfer determination in the second lottery state is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transfer determination in the first lottery state. It is shorter than a certain minimum time. As described above, the maximum time of the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is the predetermined time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state. By being shorter than the minimum time, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state can always and reliably be shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. This makes it possible to ensure that the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a difference in the game time of the notification game, and that there is a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. The playability can be improved.

  By the way, when the player selects the second lottery state without intentionally establishing the specific conditions in the special game, the notification game time (number of times) is prioritized over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game. It is assumed that In this case, if a game time of the notification game that is longer than the game time of the notification game in the first lottery state is selected as the game time of the notification game, the player may feel frustrated or stressed. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F6, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state can always and surely be shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. it can. Accordingly, a player who selects the second lottery state by giving priority to the notification game time (number of times) over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game can be frustrated or stressed by the longer notification game time. Feel is reduced.

[Appendix F7]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F6, wherein the specific time is a fixed game time.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F7, the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state is fixed. In this way, by fixing the specific time, which is the game time of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state, the notification game can be repeatedly executed in a short time with a constant rhythm. Thereby, feeling of irritation and stress in the second lottery state is further reduced.

[Appendix F8]
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is Determine the predetermined time,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) does not cause the transition to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F7, wherein the specific time is determined.

  By the way, in a jackpot lottery in a general gaming machine, even if the state is probable, it is far more likely that the player loses the jackpot than the jackpot. Also, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the decoration symbol is long, it is assumed that the player feels frustration or stress.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F8, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special gaming state, a notification game for reporting the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time. In the case where the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, a notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed at a specific time. As described above, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time, and the transition determination in the second lottery state is performed. If the result of is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed in a specific time, thereby ensuring at least the overall notification game time in the second lottery state. In the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state, when the result of the transition determination is not a transition to the special game state, the player is less likely to feel frustrated or stressed.

[Appendix F9]
A restricted state that restricts the passage of the game ball in the specified area (315) that gives an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball, and an allowable state that allows the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area (315). And an electric accessory (315b) for switching between
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), the frequency or probability of switching to the first electric auditors product operating state (normal gaming state) and the allowable state by the electric auditors product (315b) is the first electric auditors product. A second electric auditors product operation state higher than the operation state (time-saving gaming state),
The notification game time determination means (41) sets the notification game time as the game time of the notification game when the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in the second electric auditors operation state (time saving game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F8, wherein the specific time is determined.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F9, the second electric auditors operation state (the time-saving gaming state) in which the frequency or the probability that the second lottery state is switched to the allowable state in which the passing of the game ball in the specified area is allowed by the electric auditors is switched. ), The specific time is determined as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the shift determination. In this manner, when the second lottery state is the second electric auditors product operating state (time-saving gaming state) having a high frequency or probability of being switched to an allowable state in which the passing of game balls in the specified area is allowed by the electric auditors. By determining the specific time as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the transfer determination, the transfer determination is frequently performed in the second lottery state, and more notification games can be executed in a short time. . Thereby, the digestion speed of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state can be increased, and the second lottery state can be ended in a short time. Therefore, for example, when the player selects the transition to the second lottery state that the specific condition is not satisfied in the special game, the second lottery state can be completed in a short time, so that the player's wish can be satisfied. It is possible to reduce the feeling of irritation and stress of the player in the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state while reliably fulfilling the condition.

[Appendix F10]
The first lottery state (high probability mode) ends when at least the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special game state (big hit game) a predetermined number of times in succession. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 9, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10, the first lottery state ends when at least the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state does not result in the transition to the special gaming state (big hit game) for a predetermined number of consecutive times. Therefore, in the gaming machine which ends when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is at least not a predetermined number of consecutive transitions to the special gaming state (big hit game) in the first lottery state, a new gaming property is provided. Is given.

[Appendix F11]
After the end of the special game (big hit game), further provided is a lottery state transition means (41) for transitioning to one of the first lottery state (high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode),
The lottery state shifting means (41), when a game ball passes through a predetermined area in the special game, shifts to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special game. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F11, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area in a special game, the game machine is shifted to a first lottery state after the end of the special game. That is, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special game when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special game, and the result of the shift determination in the first lottery state is at least a predetermined number of times in the first lottery state. Then, the game is ended when the game is not shifted to the special game state (big hit game). Thereby, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special game in the first lottery state, the game is shifted after the end of the special game, and the result of the shift determination in the first lottery state is at least a predetermined number of times in the first lottery state. A new gaming property is given to a gaming machine that ends when it is not shifted to the special gaming state (big hit game).

[Appendix F12]
After the end of the special game (big hit game), further provided is a lottery state transition means (41) for transitioning to one of the first lottery state (high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode),
The special game is a special game in which, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area in the special game, the lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special game. Including special games (probable jackpot games)
The lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special special game when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special special game, and The gaming machine according to Supplementary note F10 or F11, wherein the game is shifted to the second lottery state (low-probability mode) after the end of the special special game when a game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in a game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F12, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special special game, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, and when the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the special special game. After the end of the special special game, the game is shifted to the second lottery state. Therefore, the first lottery state ends when at least the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state does not cause the transition to the special game state (big hit game) for a predetermined number of times, and ends in the special lottery state. When the game ball passes through, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, and when the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the special special game, the game is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special special game. In gaming machines, new gaming properties are provided.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F12, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special special game, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the special special game. In this case, the game is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special special game, so that the player can select whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area in the special special game. That is, in the special special game, by selecting whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area, in the special special game, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, It is possible to select whether to shift to the 2 lottery state. With this, the player establishes the specific condition in the special game state when giving priority to the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game over the notification game time (number of times), and obtains the privilege obtained by executing the special game. When the priority is given to (payout), it is selected to satisfy the specific condition in the special game state, and when the notification game time (number of times) is given priority over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game, the specific condition is given. Can be selected not to hold. This makes it possible to select a lottery state according to the situation and intention of the player, including the case where there is a time constraint of the player.

[Appendix F13]
When the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state (big hit game), a game state shift means (41) for shifting to the special game state after the end of the notification game for notifying the result of the shift determination. Further comprising
The game state shifting means (41) is configured to execute the special special game when the result of the shift determination in the second lottery state (low probability mode) is to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F12, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to a gaming state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F13, when the result of the shift determination in the second lottery state is to shift to the special game state, the game machine is shifted to the special game state in which the special special game is executed. That is, if the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state, which has a lower transition determination probability than the first lottery state and is disadvantageous to the player, is to transition to the special game state, it is advantageous to the player in the special game state. The special special game that can be shifted to the first lottery state is executed. Thus, in the disadvantageous first lottery state, if the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state, the player can execute a special special game that can transition to the advantageous first lottery state. It is possible to enjoy the advantage of being shifted to the special game state.

[Appendix F14]
A special area (362) having the predetermined area and a specific area (362) for giving a privilege to a player through the passage of a game ball;
By controlling the operation of the privilege granting means (36), the first allowable state in which the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is permitted, and the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is restricted, and the specific area is controlled. Operation control means (41) for switching between a second permissible state in which the passage of the game ball to is permitted;
Further comprising
In the special special game, the operation control means (41) sets a first allowable state in which the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is permitted, and restricts the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area. The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note F12 or F13, wherein the game machine can be switched between a second permissible state in which the passing of the game ball is permitted.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F14, in the special special game, the first allowable state in which the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is allowed, and the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is restricted, and the passing of the game ball to the specific area is performed. It is possible to switch between a second allowable state in which passage is allowed. As described above, in the special special game, the first allowable state in which the passage of the game ball to the predetermined area is permitted, the passage of the game ball to the predetermined area is restricted, and the passage of the game ball to the specific area is permitted. In the case of selecting to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game in the special special game by being switchable to the second allowable state, the passing of the game ball to the specific area in the second allowable state (Prize ball) can be obtained. Thus, even when the player selects to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game in the special special game, it is not necessary to abandon all the special benefits in the special special game.

[Appendix F15]
The operation control means (41) is configured to change the first allowable state from the first allowable state when the game ball passes through the predetermined area or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first allowable state. The gaming machine according to supplementary note F14, wherein the gaming machine is switched to a two-permitted state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F15, the game machine switches from the first allowance state to the second allowance state when a game ball passes through a predetermined area or when a certain time has elapsed since the first allowance. Can be In this way, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, or when a certain time has elapsed after the first allowance, the first allowance state is switched to the second allowance state, In the special special game, not only when selecting to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, but also when selecting to shift to the first lottery state, enjoy the benefits of the special special game. be able to.

[Appendix F16]
The special special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) for granting the privilege to a player,
The plurality of unit games include at least one specific unit game (V winning round game) in which the privilege granting unit is operated,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note F15, wherein the operation control means (41) performs control to the first allowable state at the start of the specific unit game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F16, at the start of the specific unit game of the special special game, the gaming machine is controlled to the first allowable state. That is, in a specific unit game, the game is started from the first allowable state, and is switched to the second allowable state after a predetermined time has elapsed. That is, a game ball can pass through a predetermined area until a certain time has elapsed from the start of a specific unit game, and after a certain time has passed, the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is restricted. Therefore, it is easy for the player to select whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area, and when the player wishes to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game in the special special game, the player can easily and surely make it. After the end of the special special game, the game can be shifted to the first lottery state.

[Appendix F17]
The specific unit game is stored in the predetermined area and the specific area when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation of the privilege providing means (36) is started by the operation control means (41), or within the predetermined time. It ends when the maximum number of game balls pass in total,
The gaming machine according to claim F16, wherein the maximum time in the second allowable state is set to a time during which the upper limit number of game balls can pass through the specific area.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F17, the maximum time in the second allowable state is set to a time during which the upper limit number of game balls can pass through the specific area. In this manner, by setting the maximum time of the second allowable state to the time during which the upper limit number of game balls can pass through the specific area, the player can perform the specific game like the specific unit game other than the specific unit game. It is possible to acquire the maximum privilege (prize ball) obtained in the unit game.

[Appendix F18]
In the special special game, when the operation control unit (41) switches from the first allowable state to the second allowable state, a switching display unit that explicitly or suggests that the state has been switched to the second allowable state. 341),
The gaming machine according to supplementary note F15, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F18, in the special special game, when the operation control unit (41) switches from the first allowable state to the second allowable state, it is explicitly or suggested that the state has been switched to the second allowable state. As described above, in the special special game, when the operation control means (41) switches from the first allowable state to the second allowable state, it is explicitly or suggested that the operation has been switched to the second allowable state. Can recognize that the state has been switched from the first allowable state to the second allowable state. This makes it easy for the player to select whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area, and in the special special game, when wishing to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, it is easy and reliable. Can be shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game.

[Appendix F19]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note F18, wherein the switching display means (341) specifies or suggests a timing at which the predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F19, a timing at which a certain time period during which the state is switched from the first allowable state to the second allowable state elapses is explicitly or suggested. In this manner, by explicitly or suggesting the timing at which the fixed time period for switching from the first allowable state to the second allowable state elapses, the player can simply switch from the first allowable state to the second allowable state. In addition, the remaining time and timing until switching from the first allowable state to the second allowable state can be grasped. This makes it easier for the player to select whether or not to allow the game ball to pass through the predetermined area, and to make it easier to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game in the special special game. In addition, it is possible to more reliably shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game.

[Appendix F20]
The special game state includes a first special game state (probable change game state) which is shifted to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special game, and a second lottery state ( Low special mode), and
The lottery state determination means (41) sets the first lottery state as a lottery state when the special game is over, when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state (big hit game). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F9, wherein it is determined whether to make a transition to one of a high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F20, when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, the special game is ended, and the lottery state is set to one of the first lottery state and the second lottery state. It is determined whether to shift. Therefore, if the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, it is determined whether to shift to the first lottery state or the second lottery state as the lottery state when the special game has ended. New gaming machine.

[Appendix G1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41);
A first lottery state (high-probability mode) in which a transition determination probability (big hit probability) at which a result of the transition determination makes a transition to the special game state (big hit game) is a first transition determination probability; and the transfer determination probability A lottery state determining means (41) for determining which of a second lottery state (low probability mode) in which the (big hit probability) is lower than the first shift determination probability;
Notification game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of the notification game when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41);
With
The first lottery state (high probability mode) ends at least when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special game state (big hit game) for a predetermined number of times, and ends.
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41), a predetermined time is determined as a game time of the notification game,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination unit (41), a specific time shorter than a predetermined time is determined as the game time of the notification game. Gaming machine to do.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, as the lottery state for performing the transition determination, the first lottery state in which the transition determination probability is high and the game time of the notification game is performed for a predetermined time is long, and the transition determination probability is low and the notification game is predetermined. The second lottery state executed in a specific time shorter than the time, and the first lottery state is shifted to the special game state (big hit game) at least a predetermined number of times at least as a result of the shift determination in the first lottery state. It ends when it is not a thing. The first lottery state is advantageous to the player in that the transition determination probability is high, but since the game time of the notification game is long, the number of executions of the notification game per unit time is reduced. On the other hand, the second lottery state is disadvantageous to the player in that the transition determination probability is low, but the number of executions of the notification game per unit time increases because the game time of the notification game is short. Thus, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have different characteristics in the transition determination probability and the game time of the notification game. Therefore, by including the first lottery state and the second lottery state having different characteristics in the transition determination probability and the game time of the notification game as the lottery state for performing the transition determination, the first lottery state is at least in the first lottery state. A new gaming property is provided to a gaming machine that ends when the result of the shift determination is not to shift to the special game state (big hit game) continuously for a predetermined number of times.

[Appendix G2]
After the end of the special game (big hit game), further provided is a lottery state transition means (41) for transitioning to one of the first lottery state (high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode),
The said lottery state transition means (41), when a game ball passes through a predetermined area in the special game, makes a transition to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special game. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G2, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area in a special game, the game is shifted to a first lottery state after the end of the special game. That is, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special game when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special game, and the result of the shift determination in the first lottery state is at least a predetermined number of times in the first lottery state. Then, the game is ended when the game is not shifted to the special game state (big hit game). Thereby, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special game in the first lottery state, the game is shifted after the end of the special game, and the result of the shift determination in the first lottery state is at least a predetermined number of times in the first lottery state. A new gaming property is given to a gaming machine that ends when it is not shifted to the special gaming state (big hit game).

[Appendix G3]
The first lottery state (high-probability mode) has an expected amount of bonuses (big-hit expected value, outgoing value) obtained as a result of the execution of the same number of times of the shift determination as compared to the second lottery state (low-probability mode). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1 or G2, wherein the expected ball value is large.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G3, the expected amount of bonus (expected jackpot value, expected ball-out value) obtained as a result of executing the shift determination the same number of times in the first lottery state as compared to the second lottery state is different. large. Therefore, the first lottery state and the second lottery state not only have different transition determination probabilities, but also have a different expected amount of privilege obtained as a result of performing the same number of transition determinations. Accordingly, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a further difference, so that a gaming machine having further novel gaming properties is provided.

[Appendix G4]
After the end of the special game (big hit game), further provided is a lottery state transition means (41) for transitioning to one of the first lottery state (high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode),
The lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the second lottery state after the end of the special game when a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game, and the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G1 to G3, wherein when the special game is not performed, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G4, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game, the game is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special game, and when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the special game, the special game is executed. After the end, the state is shifted to the first lottery state. As described above, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game, the state is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special game. By shifting to the lottery state, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game while paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game.

[Appendix G5]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G4, wherein the player can select whether or not to satisfy the specific condition in the special game.

  By the way, there is a case where the surely changing game state continues until the game hall is closed, and the user is forced to leave the game hall in the surely changing game state. In addition, the player may have a limited game time due to the use of the game, and may have a certain-variable game state at his or her scheduled closing time. In other words, in a situation where there is a time constraint between the closing time of the game hall and the scheduled closing time of the game hall, a situation may occur in which it is necessary to leave the shop in the probable change game state. When such a situation is expected to occur, if a sufficient game time can be secured, more balls may be obtained, and thus there is a tendency that it is not desired to end the game in the probable game state. Further, the player desires to execute the notification game as many times as possible in a short time as much as possible within the range of the remaining game time, and eventually to execute the big hit game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the supplementary note G5, the player can select whether or not to satisfy a specific condition in the special game. As described above, the player can select whether or not to satisfy the specific condition in the special game, so that the player can obtain a privilege (payout ball) obtained by executing the special game rather than the notification game time (number of times). When the priority is given, the special condition is established in the special game state, and when the priority (payout) obtained by executing the special game is prioritized, the specific condition is established in the special game state, and the execution of the special game is selected. In the case where the notification game time (number of times) is prioritized over the privilege (payout) obtained by the above, it is possible to select that the specific condition is not satisfied. This makes it possible to select a lottery state according to the situation and intention of the player, including the case where there is a time constraint of the player.

[Appendix G6]
The second transition determination probability (big hit probability in the low probability mode) includes a plurality of different transition determination probabilities,
The supplementary note G1 wherein the first transition determination probability (big hit probability in the high probability mode) is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. To gaming machine according to any of supplementary notes G5.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G6, the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among a plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. As described above, since the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability, the transition determination probability in the first lottery state is set to the second transition determination probability. The transition determination probability in the lottery state can be reliably increased. This makes it possible to reliably make a difference between the first lottery state and the second lottery state with respect to the transition determination probability, and to make a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. Can be improved, so that the playability is improved.

[Appendix G7]
At least one of the predetermined time and the specific time includes a plurality of game times, and a maximum time (time saving) of the specific time is shorter than a minimum time of the predetermined time. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G7, the maximum time of the specific time, which is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transfer determination in the second lottery state, is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transfer determination in the first lottery state. It is shorter than a certain minimum time. As described above, the maximum time of the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is the predetermined time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state. By being shorter than the minimum time, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state can always and reliably be shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. This makes it possible to ensure that the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a difference in the game time of the notification game, and that there is a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. The playability can be improved.

  By the way, when the player selects the second lottery state without intentionally establishing the specific conditions in the special game, the notification game time (number of times) is prioritized over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game. It is assumed that In this case, if a game time of the notification game that is longer than the game time of the notification game in the first lottery state is selected as the game time of the notification game, the player may feel frustrated or stressed. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G7, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state is always and surely shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. it can. Accordingly, a player who selects the second lottery state by giving priority to the notification game time (number of times) over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game can be frustrated or stressed by the longer notification game time. Feel is reduced.

[Appendix G8]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G7, wherein the specific time is a fixed game time.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G8, a specific time that is a game time of the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state is fixed. In this way, by fixing the specific time, which is the game time of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state, the notification game can be repeatedly executed in a short time with a constant rhythm. Thereby, feeling of irritation and stress in the second lottery state is further reduced.

[Appendix G9]
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is Determine the predetermined time,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) does not cause the transition to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G8, wherein the specific time is determined.

  By the way, in a jackpot lottery in a general gaming machine, even if the state is probable, it is far more likely that the player loses the jackpot than the jackpot. Also, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the decoration symbol is long, it is assumed that the player feels frustration or stress.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G9, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special gaming state, a notification game for reporting the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time. In the case where the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, a notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed at a specific time. As described above, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time, and the transition determination in the second lottery state is performed. If the result of is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed in a specific time, thereby ensuring at least the overall notification game time in the second lottery state. In the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state, when the result of the transition determination is not a transition to the special game state, the player is less likely to feel frustrated or stressed.

[Appendix G10]
A restricted state that restricts the passage of the game ball in the specified area (315) that gives an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball, and an allowable state that allows the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area (315). And an electric accessory (315b) for switching between
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), the frequency or probability of switching to the first electric auditors product operating state (normal gaming state) and the allowable state by the electric auditors product (315b) is the first electric auditors product. A second electric auditors product operation state higher than the operation state (time-saving gaming state),
The notification game time determination means (41) sets the notification game time as the game time of the notification game when the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in the second electric auditors operation state (time saving game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G9, wherein the specific time is determined.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G10, the second electric auditors product operating state (time-saving gaming state) having a high frequency or probability that the second lottery state is switched to the allowable state in which the passing of gaming balls in the specified area is allowed by the electric auditors. ), The specific time is determined as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the shift determination. In this manner, when the second lottery state is the second electric auditors product operating state (time-saving gaming state) having a high frequency or probability of being switched to an allowable state in which the passing of game balls in the specified area is allowed by the electric auditors. By determining the specific time as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the transfer determination, the transfer determination is frequently performed in the second lottery state, and more notification games can be executed in a short time. . Thereby, the digestion speed of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state can be increased, and the second lottery state can be ended in a short time. Therefore, for example, when the player selects the transition to the second lottery state that the specific condition is not satisfied in the special game, the second lottery state can be completed in a short time, so that the player's wish can be satisfied. It is possible to reduce the feeling of irritation and stress of the player in the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state while reliably fulfilling the condition.

[Appendix H1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41);
A first lottery state (high-probability mode) in which a transition determination probability (big hit probability) at which a result of the transition determination makes a transition to the special game state (big hit game) is a first transition determination probability; and the transfer determination probability A lottery state determining means (41) for determining which of a second lottery state (low probability mode) in which the (big hit probability) is lower than the first shift determination probability;
Notification game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of the notification game when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41);
After the end of the special game (big hit game), a lottery state shifting means (41) for shifting to one of the first lottery state (high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode),
With
The first lottery state (high probability mode) ends at least when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special game state (big hit game) for a predetermined number of times, and ends.
The special game is a special game in which, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area in the special game, the lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special game. Including special games (probable jackpot games)
The lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special special game when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special special game, and When the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the game, the game is shifted to the second lottery state (low probability mode) after the end of the special special game,
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41), a predetermined time is determined as a game time of the notification game,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination unit (41), a specific time shorter than a predetermined time is determined as the game time of the notification game. Gaming machine to do.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, as the lottery state in which the transition determination is performed, the transition determination probability is high, the first lottery state in which the game time of the notification game is performed for a predetermined long time, and the transition determination probability is low and the notification game is determined in the predetermined state. The second lottery state executed in a specific time shorter than the time, and the first lottery state is shifted to the special game state (big hit game) at least as many times as the result of the shift determination in the first lottery state. It ends when it is not a thing. In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special special game, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the special special game. In this case, the state is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special special game. The first lottery state is advantageous to the player in that the transition determination probability is high, but since the game time of the notification game is long, the number of executions of the notification game per unit time is reduced. On the other hand, the second lottery state is disadvantageous to the player in that the transition determination probability is low, but the number of executions of the notification game per unit time increases because the game time of the notification game is short. Thus, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have different characteristics in the transition determination probability and the game time of the notification game. Therefore, by including the first lottery state and the second lottery state having different characteristics in the transition determination probability and the game time of the notification game as the lottery state for performing the transition determination, the first lottery state is at least in the first lottery state. The game is terminated when the result of the transition determination is not a transition to the special game state (big hit game) a predetermined number of times in a row, and after the special special game is over when the game ball passes through a predetermined area in the special special game. When the game machine is shifted to the first lottery state and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the special special game, and is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special special game, a new gaming property is provided.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special special game, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the special special game. In this case, the game is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special special game, so that the player can select whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area in the special special game. That is, in the special special game, by selecting whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area, in the special special game, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, It is possible to select whether to shift to the 2 lottery state. With this, the player establishes the specific condition in the special game state when giving priority to the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game over the notification game time (number of times), and obtains the privilege obtained by executing the special game. When the priority is given to (payout), it is selected to satisfy the specific condition in the special game state, and when the notification game time (number of times) is given priority over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game, the specific condition is given. Can be selected not to hold. This makes it possible to select a lottery state according to the situation and intention of the player, including the case where there is a time constraint of the player.

[Appendix H2]
When the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state (big hit game), a game state shift means (41) for shifting to the special game state after the end of the notification game for notifying the result of the shift determination. Further comprising
The game state shifting means (41) is configured to execute the special special game when the result of the shift determination in the second lottery state (low probability mode) is to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to a gaming state.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H2, when the result of the shift determination in the second lottery state is to shift to the special game state, the game machine is shifted to the special game state in which the special special game is executed. That is, if the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state, which has a lower transition determination probability than the first lottery state and is disadvantageous to the player, is to transition to the special game state, it is advantageous to the player in the special game state. The special special game that can be shifted to the first lottery state is executed. Thus, in the disadvantageous first lottery state, if the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game state, the player can execute a special special game that can transition to the advantageous first lottery state. It is possible to enjoy the advantage of being shifted to the special game state.

[Appendix H3]
The first lottery state (high-probability mode) has an expected amount of bonuses (big-hit expected value, outgoing value) obtained as a result of the execution of the same number of times of the shift determination as compared to the second lottery state (low-probability mode). The gaming machine according to supplementary note H1 or supplementary note H2, wherein the expected ball value is large.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H3, the expected amount of bonus (expected big hit value, expected ball-out value) obtained as a result of the execution of the shift determination of the same number of times in the first lottery state is compared with the second lottery state. large. Therefore, the first lottery state and the second lottery state not only have different transition determination probabilities, but also have a different expected amount of privilege obtained as a result of performing the same number of transition determinations. Accordingly, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a further difference, so that a gaming machine having further novel gaming properties is provided.

[Appendix H4]
The second transition determination probability (big hit probability in the low probability mode) includes a plurality of different transition determination probabilities,
The supplementary note H1 wherein the first transition determination probability (big hit probability in the high probability mode) is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. To H3.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note H4, the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among a plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. As described above, since the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability, the transition determination probability in the first lottery state is set to the second transition determination probability. The transition determination probability in the lottery state can be reliably increased. This makes it possible to reliably make a difference between the first lottery state and the second lottery state with respect to the transition determination probability, and to make a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. Can be improved, so that the playability is improved.

[Appendix H5]
At least one of the predetermined time and the specific time includes a plurality of game times, and a maximum time (time saving) of the specific time is shorter than a minimum time of the predetermined time. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H5, the maximum time of the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transfer determination in the second lottery state is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transfer determination in the first lottery state. It is shorter than a certain minimum time. As described above, the maximum time of the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is the predetermined time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state. By being shorter than the minimum time, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state can always and reliably be shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. This makes it possible to ensure that the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a difference in the game time of the notification game, and that there is a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. The playability can be improved.

  By the way, when the player selects the second lottery state without intentionally establishing the specific conditions in the special game, the notification game time (number of times) is prioritized over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game. It is assumed that In this case, if a game time of the notification game that is longer than the game time of the notification game in the first lottery state is selected as the game time of the notification game, the player may feel frustrated or stressed. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H5, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state is always and surely shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. it can. Accordingly, a player who selects the second lottery state by giving priority to the notification game time (number of times) over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game can be frustrated or stressed by the longer notification game time. Feel is reduced.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H5, wherein the specific time is a fixed game time.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6, a specific time that is a game time of the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state is fixed. In this way, by fixing the specific time, which is the game time of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state, the notification game can be repeatedly executed in a short time with a constant rhythm. Thereby, feeling of irritation and stress in the second lottery state is further reduced.

[Appendix H7]
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is Determine the predetermined time,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) does not cause the transition to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes H1 to H6, wherein the specific time is determined.

  By the way, in a jackpot lottery in a general gaming machine, even if the state is probable, it is far more likely that the player loses the jackpot than the jackpot. Also, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the decoration symbol is long, it is assumed that the player feels frustration or stress.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special gaming state, a notification game for reporting the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time. In the case where the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, a notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed at a specific time. As described above, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time, and the transition determination in the second lottery state is performed. If the result of is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed in a specific time, thereby ensuring at least the overall notification game time in the second lottery state. In the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state, when the result of the transition determination is not a transition to the special game state, the player is less likely to feel frustrated or stressed.

[Appendix H8]
A restricted state that restricts the passage of the game ball in the specified area (315) that gives an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball, and an allowable state that allows the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area (315). And an electric accessory (315b) for switching between
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), the frequency or probability of switching to the first electric auditors product operating state (normal gaming state) and the allowable state by the electric auditors product (315b) is the first electric auditors product. A second electric auditors product operation state higher than the operation state (time-saving gaming state),
The notification game time determination means (41) sets the notification game time as the game time of the notification game when the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in the second electric auditors operation state (time saving game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes H1 to H7, wherein the specific time is determined.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H8, the second electric prize operating state (the time-saving gaming state) in which the second lottery state is switched to the allowable state in which the passing of the game ball in the specified area is permitted by the electric auditors is high. ), The specific time is determined as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the shift determination. In this manner, when the second lottery state is the second electric auditors product operating state (time-saving gaming state) having a high frequency or probability of being switched to an allowable state in which the passing of game balls in the specified area is allowed by the electric auditors. By determining the specific time as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the transfer determination, the transfer determination is frequently performed in the second lottery state, and more notification games can be executed in a short time. . Thereby, the digestion speed of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state can be increased, and the second lottery state can be ended in a short time. Therefore, for example, when the player selects the transition to the second lottery state that the specific condition is not satisfied in the special game, the second lottery state can be completed in a short time, so that the player's wish can be satisfied. It is possible to reduce the feeling of irritation and stress of the player in the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state while reliably fulfilling the condition.

[Appendix I1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41);
A first lottery state (high-probability mode) in which a transition determination probability (big hit probability) at which a result of the transition determination makes a transition to the special game state (big hit game) is a first transition determination probability; and the transfer determination probability A lottery state determining means (41) for determining which of a second lottery state (low probability mode) in which the (big hit probability) is lower than the first shift determination probability;
Notification game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of the notification game when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41);
After the end of the special game (big hit game), a lottery state shifting means (41) for shifting to one of the first lottery state (high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode),
With
The special game is a special game in which, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area in the special game, the lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special game. Including special games (probable jackpot games)
The lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special special game when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special special game, and When the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the game, the game is shifted to the second lottery state (low probability mode) after the end of the special special game,
A special area (362) having the predetermined area and a specific area (362) for giving a privilege to a player through the passage of a game ball;
By controlling the operation of the privilege granting means (36), the first allowable state in which the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is permitted, and the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is restricted, and the specific area is controlled. Operation control means (41) for switching between a second permissible state in which the passage of the game ball to is permitted;
Further comprising
In the special special game, the operation control means (41) sets a first allowable state in which the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is permitted, and restricts the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area. It is possible to switch to a second allowable state in which the passing of the game ball to is allowed,
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41), a predetermined time is determined as a game time of the notification game,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination unit (41), a specific time shorter than a predetermined time is determined as the game time of the notification game. Gaming machine to do.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, as the lottery state in which the transition determination is performed, the transition determination probability is high, the first lottery state in which the game time of the notification game is executed for a predetermined long time, and the transition determination probability is low and the notification game is in the predetermined state. And a second lottery state executed in a specific time shorter than the time. In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special special game, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the special special game. In this case, the state is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special special game. The first lottery state is advantageous to the player in that the transition determination probability is high, but since the game time of the notification game is long, the number of executions of the notification game per unit time is reduced. On the other hand, the second lottery state is disadvantageous to the player in that the transition determination probability is low, but the number of executions of the notification game per unit time increases because the game time of the notification game is short. Thus, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have different characteristics in the transition determination probability and the game time of the notification game. Therefore, by including the first lottery state and the second lottery state having different characteristics in the transition determination probability and the game time of the notification game as the lottery state for performing the transition determination, the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special special game. In the case where the special lottery is over, the game machine is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, and when the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the special special game, the game machine is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special special game. Playability is provided.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special special game, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, and the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the special special game. In this case, the game is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special special game, so that the player can select whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area in the special special game. That is, in the special special game, by selecting whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area, in the special special game, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, It is possible to select whether to shift to the 2 lottery state. With this, the player establishes the specific condition in the special game state when giving priority to the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game over the notification game time (number of times), and obtains the privilege obtained by executing the special game. When the priority is given to (payout), it is selected to satisfy the specific condition in the special game state, and when the notification game time (number of times) is given priority over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game, the specific condition is given. Can be selected not to hold. This makes it possible to select a lottery state according to the situation and intention of the player, including the case where there is a time constraint of the player.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, in the special special game, the first allowable state in which the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is allowed, and the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is restricted, and the game to the specific area is performed. It is possible to switch between a second allowable state in which the passage of the ball is allowed. As described above, in the special special game, the first allowable state in which the passage of the game ball to the predetermined area is permitted, the passage of the game ball to the predetermined area is restricted, and the passage of the game ball to the specific area is permitted. In the case of selecting to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game in the special special game by being switchable to the second allowable state, the passing of the game ball to the specific area in the second allowable state (Prize ball) can be obtained. Thus, even when the player selects to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game in the special special game, it is not necessary to abandon all the special benefits in the special special game.

[Appendix I2]
The operation control means (41) is configured to change the first allowable state from the first allowable state when the game ball passes through the predetermined area or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first allowable state. 2. The gaming machine according to supplementary note I1, wherein the gaming machine is switched to an allowable state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I2, the game machine switches from the first allowable state to the second allowable state when the game ball passes through the predetermined area or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first allowable state. Can be In this way, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, or when a certain time has elapsed after the first allowance, the first allowance state is switched to the second allowance state, In the special special game, not only when selecting to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, but also when selecting to shift to the first lottery state, enjoy the benefits of the special special game. be able to.

[Appendix I3]
The special special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) for granting the privilege to a player,
The plurality of unit games include at least one specific unit game (V winning round game) in which the privilege granting unit is operated,
The gaming machine according to attachment I2, wherein the operation control means (41) performs control to the first allowable state at the start of the specific unit game.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note I3, at the start of the specific unit game of the special special game, the gaming machine is controlled to the first allowable state. That is, in a specific unit game, the game is started from the first allowable state, and is switched to the second allowable state after a predetermined time has elapsed. That is, a game ball can pass through a predetermined area until a certain time has elapsed from the start of a specific unit game, and after a certain time has passed, the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is restricted. Therefore, it is easy for the player to select whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area, and when the player wishes to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game in the special special game, the player can easily and surely make it. After the end of the special special game, the game can be shifted to the first lottery state.

[Appendix I4]
The specific unit game is stored in the predetermined area and the specific area when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation of the privilege providing means (36) is started by the operation control means (41), or within the predetermined time. It ends when the maximum number of game balls pass in total,
The gaming machine according to attachment I3, wherein the maximum time of the second allowable state is set to a time during which the upper limit number of game balls can pass through the specific area.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note I4, the maximum time in the second allowable state is set to a time during which the upper limit number of game balls can pass through the specific area. In this manner, by setting the maximum time of the second allowable state to the time during which the upper limit number of game balls can pass through the specific area, the player can perform the specific game like the specific unit game other than the specific unit game. It is possible to acquire the maximum privilege (prize ball) obtained in the unit game.

[Appendix I5]
The first lottery state (high-probability mode) has an expected amount of bonuses (big-hit expected value, outgoing value) obtained as a result of the execution of the same number of times of the shift determination as compared to the second lottery state (low-probability mode). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1 to Supplementary Note I4, characterized in that the expected ball value is large.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I5, the expected amount of bonuses (expected big hit value, expected payout value) obtained as a result of performing the same number of times of the shift determination in the first lottery state as compared to the second lottery state is different. large. Therefore, the first lottery state and the second lottery state not only have different transition determination probabilities, but also have a different expected amount of privilege obtained as a result of performing the same number of transition determinations. Accordingly, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a further difference, so that a gaming machine having further novel gaming properties is provided.

[Appendix I6]
After the end of the special game (big hit game), further provided is a lottery state transition means (41) for transitioning to one of the first lottery state (high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode),
The lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the second lottery state after the end of the special game when a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game, and the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes I1 to I5, wherein when the special game is not performed, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I6, when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game, the game is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special game, and when the specific condition is not satisfied during execution of the special game, After the end, the state is shifted to the first lottery state. As described above, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game, the state is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special game. By shifting to the lottery state, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game while paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game.

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F6, wherein a player can select whether or not to satisfy the specific condition in the special game.

  By the way, there is a case where the surely changing game state continues until the game hall is closed, and the user is forced to leave the game hall in the surely changing game state. In addition, the player may have a limited game time due to the use of the game, and may have a certain-variable game state at his or her scheduled closing time. In other words, in a situation where there is a time constraint between the closing time of the game hall and the scheduled closing time of the game hall, a situation may occur in which it is necessary to leave the shop in the probable change game state. When such a situation is expected to occur, if a sufficient game time can be secured, more balls may be obtained, and thus there is a tendency that it is not desired to end the game in the probable game state. Further, the player desires to execute the notification game as many times as possible in a short time as much as possible within the range of the remaining game time, and eventually to execute the big hit game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I7, the player can select whether or not to satisfy a specific condition in the special game. As described above, the player can select whether or not to satisfy the specific condition in the special game, so that the player can obtain a privilege (payout ball) obtained by executing the special game rather than the notification game time (number of times). When the priority is given, the special condition is established in the special game state, and when the priority (payout) obtained by executing the special game is prioritized, the specific condition is established in the special game state, and the execution of the special game is selected. In the case where the notification game time (number of times) is prioritized over the privilege (payout) obtained by the above, it is possible to select that the specific condition is not satisfied. This makes it possible to select a lottery state according to the situation and intention of the player, including the case where there is a time constraint of the player.

[Appendix I8]
The second transition determination probability (big hit probability in the low probability mode) includes a plurality of different transition determination probabilities,
The supplementary note I1 wherein the first transition determination probability (the jackpot probability in the high probability mode) is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note I7.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note I8, the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. As described above, since the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability, the transition determination probability in the first lottery state is set to the second transition determination probability. The transition determination probability in the lottery state can be reliably increased. This makes it possible to reliably make a difference between the first lottery state and the second lottery state with respect to the transition determination probability, and to make a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. Can be improved, so that the playability is improved.

[Appendix I9]
At least one of the predetermined time and the specific time includes a plurality of game times, and a maximum time (time saving) of the specific time is shorter than a minimum time of the predetermined time. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I9, the maximum time of the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transfer determination in the second lottery state is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transfer determination in the first lottery state. It is shorter than a certain minimum time. As described above, the maximum time of the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is the predetermined time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state. By being shorter than the minimum time, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state can always and reliably be shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. This makes it possible to ensure that the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a difference in the game time of the notification game, and that there is a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. The playability can be improved.

  By the way, when the player selects the second lottery state without intentionally establishing the specific conditions in the special game, the notification game time (number of times) is prioritized over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game. It is assumed that In this case, if a game time of the notification game that is longer than the game time of the notification game in the first lottery state is selected as the game time of the notification game, the player may feel frustrated or stressed. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I9, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state is always and surely shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. it can. Accordingly, a player who selects the second lottery state by giving priority to the notification game time (number of times) over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game can be frustrated or stressed by the longer notification game time. Feel is reduced.

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I9, wherein the specific time is a fixed game time.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I10, a specific time that is a game time of the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state is fixed. In this way, by fixing the specific time, which is the game time of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state, the notification game can be repeatedly executed in a short time with a constant rhythm. Thereby, feeling of irritation and stress in the second lottery state is further reduced.

[Appendix I11]
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is Determine the predetermined time,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) does not cause the transition to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I10, wherein the specific time is determined.

  By the way, in a jackpot lottery in a general gaming machine, even if the state is probable, it is far more likely that the player loses the jackpot than the jackpot. Also, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the decoration symbol is long, it is assumed that the player feels frustration or stress.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I11, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special gaming state, a notification game for reporting the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time. In the case where the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, a notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed at a specific time. As described above, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time, and the transition determination in the second lottery state is performed. If the result of is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed in a specific time, thereby ensuring at least the overall notification game time in the second lottery state. In the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state, when the result of the transition determination is not a transition to the special game state, the player is less likely to feel frustrated or stressed.

[Appendix I12]
A restricted state that restricts the passage of the game ball in the specified area (315) that gives an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball, and an allowable state that allows the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area (315). And an electric accessory (315b) for switching between
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), the frequency or probability of switching to the first electric auditors product operating state (normal gaming state) and the allowable state by the electric auditors product (315b) is the first electric auditors product. A second electric auditors product operation state higher than the operation state (time-saving gaming state),
The notification game time determination means (41) sets the notification game time as the game time of the notification game when the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in the second electric auditors operation state (time saving game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I11, wherein the specific time is determined.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I12, a second electric auditors product operating state (a time-saving gaming state) in which the frequency or probability that the second lottery state is switched to an allowable state in which the passing of the game ball in the specified area is allowed by the electric auditors is switched. ), The specific time is determined as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the shift determination. In this manner, when the second lottery state is the second electric auditors product operating state (time-saving gaming state) having a high frequency or probability of being switched to an allowable state in which the passing of game balls in the specified area is allowed by the electric auditors. By determining the specific time as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the transfer determination, the transfer determination is frequently performed in the second lottery state, and more notification games can be executed in a short time. . Thereby, the digestion speed of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state can be increased, and the second lottery state can be ended in a short time. Therefore, for example, when the player selects the transition to the second lottery state that the specific condition is not satisfied in the special game, the second lottery state can be completed in a short time, so that the player's wish can be satisfied. It is possible to reduce the feeling of irritation and stress of the player in the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state while reliably fulfilling the condition.

[Appendix I13]
The first lottery state (high probability mode) ends when at least the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special game state (big hit game) a predetermined number of times in succession. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I12, characterized by the following features.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I13, the first lottery state ends when at least the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a predetermined number of consecutive transitions to the special gaming state (big hit game). Therefore, in the gaming machine which ends when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is at least not a predetermined number of consecutive transitions to the special gaming state (big hit game) in the first lottery state, a new gaming property is provided. Is given.

[Appendix I14]
The said lottery state transition means (41), when a game ball passes through a predetermined area in the special game, makes a transition to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special game. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I14, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area in a special game, the game is shifted to a first lottery state after the end of the special game. That is, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special game when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special game, and the result of the shift determination in the first lottery state is at least a predetermined number of times in the first lottery state. Then, the game is ended when the game is not shifted to the special game state (big hit game). Thereby, when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special game in the first lottery state, the game is shifted after the end of the special game, and the result of the shift determination in the first lottery state is at least a predetermined number of times in the first lottery state. A new gaming property is given to a gaming machine that ends when it is not shifted to the special gaming state (big hit game).

[Appendix I15]
The special game state includes a first special game state (probable change game state) which is shifted to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special game, and a second lottery state ( Low special mode), and
The lottery state determination means (41) sets the first lottery state as a lottery state when the special game is over, when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state (big hit game). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I12, wherein it is determined whether to shift to one of the high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I15, when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, the special game is ended, and the lottery state is set to one of the first lottery state and the second lottery state. It is determined whether to shift. Therefore, if the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, it is determined whether to shift to the first lottery state or the second lottery state as the lottery state when the special game has ended. New gaming machine.

[Appendix J1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41);
A first lottery state (high-probability mode) in which a transition determination probability (big hit probability) at which a result of the transition determination makes a transition to the special game state (big hit game) is a first transition determination probability; and the transfer determination probability A lottery state determining means (41) for determining which of a second lottery state (low probability mode) in which the (big hit probability) is lower than the first shift determination probability;
Notification game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of the notification game when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41);
After the end of the special game (big hit game), a lottery state shifting means (41) for shifting to one of the first lottery state (high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode),
With
The first lottery state (high probability mode) ends at least when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special game state (big hit game) for a predetermined number of times, and ends.
The special game is a special game in which, when a game ball passes through a predetermined area in the special game, the lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special game. Including special games (probable jackpot games)
The lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special special game when the game ball passes through the predetermined area in the special special game, and When the game ball does not pass through the predetermined area in the game, the game is shifted to the second lottery state (low probability mode) after the end of the special special game,
A special area (362) having the predetermined area and a specific area (362) for giving a privilege to a player through the passage of a game ball;
By controlling the operation of the privilege granting means (36), the first allowable state in which the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is permitted, and the passing of the game ball to the predetermined area is restricted, and the specific area is controlled. Operation control means (41) for visually recognizing a second permissible state in which a game ball is allowed to pass through;
Further comprising
The operation control means (41) is configured to change the first allowable state from the first allowable state when the game ball passes through the predetermined area or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first allowable state. 2 Switch to acceptable state,
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41), a predetermined time is determined as a game time of the notification game,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination unit (41), a specific time shorter than a predetermined time is determined as the game time of the notification game. Gaming machine to do.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, the effects of Supplementary Notes H1 and H2 described above can be enjoyed. Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, in the special special game, when the operation control unit switches from the first allowable state to the second allowable state, it can be visually recognized that the state has been switched to the second allowable state. As described above, in the special special game, when the operation control unit switches the state from the first allowable state to the second allowable state, the fact that the switching to the second allowable state is visible allows the player to perform the first allowable state. It is possible to know that the state has been switched to the second allowable state. This makes it easy for the player to select whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area, and in the special special game, when wishing to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, it is easy and reliable. Can be shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game.

[Appendix J2]
In the special special game, when the operation control unit (41) switches from the first allowable state to the second allowable state, a switching display unit that explicitly or suggests that the state has been switched to the second allowable state. 341), further comprising a gaming machine according to supplementary note J1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J2, when the operation control unit switches the state from the first allowable state to the second allowable state, the switching display unit explicitly indicates or suggests that the state has been switched to the second allowable state. As described above, in the special special game, when the operation control unit switches the state from the first allowable state to the second allowable state, it is explicitly or suggested that the state has been switched to the second allowable state. It is possible to know that the state has been switched from the allowable state to the second allowable state. This makes it easy for the player to select whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area, and in the special special game, when wishing to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game, it is easy and reliable. Can be shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game.

[Appendix J3]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J2, wherein the switching display unit (341) specifies or suggests a timing at which the predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J3, a timing at which a predetermined time period during which the state is switched from the first allowable state to the second allowable state elapses is explicitly or suggested. In this manner, by explicitly or suggesting the timing at which the fixed time period for switching from the first allowable state to the second allowable state elapses, the player can simply switch from the first allowable state to the second allowable state. In addition, the remaining time and timing until switching from the first allowable state to the second allowable state can be grasped. This makes it easier for the player to select whether or not to allow the game ball to pass through the predetermined area, and to make it easier to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game in the special special game. In addition, it is possible to more reliably shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game.

[Appendix J4]
The special special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) for granting the privilege to a player,
The plurality of unit games include at least one specific unit game (V winning round game) in which the privilege granting unit is operated,
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note J1 to Supplementary Note J3, wherein the operation control means (41) performs control to the first allowable state at the start of the specific unit game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J4, at the start of the specific unit game of the special special game, the gaming machine is controlled to the first allowable state. That is, in a specific unit game, the game is started from the first allowable state, and is switched to the second allowable state after a predetermined time has elapsed. That is, a game ball can pass through a predetermined area until a certain time has elapsed from the start of a specific unit game, and after a certain time has passed, the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is restricted. Therefore, it is easy for the player to select whether or not to pass the game ball to the predetermined area, and when the player wishes to shift to the first lottery state after the end of the special special game in the special special game, the player can easily and surely make it. After the end of the special special game, the game can be shifted to the first lottery state.

[Appendix J5]
The specific unit game is stored in the predetermined area and the specific area when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation of the privilege providing means (36) is started by the operation control means (41), or within the predetermined time. It ends when the maximum number of game balls pass in total,
The gaming machine according to claim J4, wherein the maximum time of the second allowable state is set to a time during which the upper limit number of game balls can pass through the specific area.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J5, the maximum time in the second allowable state is set to a time during which the upper limit number of game balls can pass through the specific area. In this manner, by setting the maximum time of the second allowable state to the time during which the upper limit number of game balls can pass through the specific area, the player can perform the specific game like the specific unit game other than the specific unit game. It is possible to acquire the maximum privilege (prize ball) obtained in the unit game.

[Appendix J6]
The first lottery state (high-probability mode) has an expected amount of bonuses (big-hit expected value, outgoing value) obtained as a result of the execution of the same number of times of the shift determination as compared to the second lottery state (low-probability mode). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to J5, wherein the gaming machine has a large expected value of a ball.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J6, the expected amount of bonus (expected big hit value, expected ball-out value) obtained in the first lottery state as a result of the execution of the shift determination of the same number of times as compared with the second lottery state is larger. large. Therefore, the first lottery state and the second lottery state not only have different transition determination probabilities, but also have a different expected amount of privilege obtained as a result of performing the same number of transition determinations. Accordingly, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a further difference, so that a gaming machine having further novel gaming properties is provided.

[Appendix J7]
After the end of the special game (big hit game), further provided is a lottery state transition means (41) for transitioning to one of the first lottery state (high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode),
The lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the second lottery state after the end of the special game when a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game, and the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes J1 to J5, wherein when the special game is not performed, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J7, when the special condition is satisfied during execution of the special game, the game is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special game, and when the specific condition is not satisfied during execution of the special game, the special game is executed. After the end, the state is shifted to the first lottery state. As described above, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game, the state is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special game. By shifting to the lottery state, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game while paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game.

[Appendix J8]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J7, wherein a player can select whether or not to satisfy the specific condition in the special game.

  By the way, there is a case where the surely changing game state continues until the game hall is closed, and the user is forced to leave the game hall in the surely changing game state. In addition, the player may have a limited game time due to the use of the game, and may have a certain-variable game state at his or her scheduled closing time. In other words, in a situation where there is a time constraint between the closing time of the game hall and the scheduled closing time of the game hall, a situation may occur in which it is necessary to leave the shop in the probable change game state. When such a situation is expected to occur, if a sufficient game time can be secured, more balls may be obtained, and thus there is a tendency that it is not desired to end the game in the probable game state. Further, the player desires to execute the notification game as many times as possible in a short time as much as possible within the range of the remaining game time, and eventually to execute the big hit game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J8, the player can select whether or not to satisfy a specific condition in the special game. As described above, the player can select whether or not to satisfy the specific condition in the special game, so that the player can obtain a privilege (payout ball) obtained by executing the special game rather than the notification game time (number of times). When the priority is given, the special condition is established in the special game state, and when the priority (payout) obtained by executing the special game is prioritized, the specific condition is established in the special game state, and the execution of the special game is selected. In the case where the notification game time (number of times) is prioritized over the privilege (payout) obtained by the above, it is possible to select that the specific condition is not satisfied. This makes it possible to select a lottery state according to the situation and intention of the player, including the case where there is a time constraint of the player.

[Appendix J9]
The second transition determination probability (big hit probability in the low probability mode) includes a plurality of different transition determination probabilities,
The supplementary note J1 wherein the first transition determination probability (big hit probability in the high probability mode) is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. To J8.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J9, the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among a plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. As described above, since the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability, the transition determination probability in the first lottery state is set to the second transition determination probability. The transition determination probability in the lottery state can be reliably increased. This makes it possible to reliably make a difference between the first lottery state and the second lottery state with respect to the transition determination probability, and to make a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. Can be improved, so that the playability is improved.

[Appendix J10]
At least one of the predetermined time and the specific time includes a plurality of game times, and a maximum time (time saving) of the specific time is shorter than a minimum time of the predetermined time. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10, the maximum time of the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transfer determination in the second lottery state is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transfer determination in the first lottery state. It is shorter than a certain minimum time. As described above, the maximum time of the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is the predetermined time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state. By being shorter than the minimum time, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state can always and reliably be shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. This makes it possible to ensure that the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a difference in the game time of the notification game, and that there is a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. The playability can be improved.

  By the way, when the player selects the second lottery state without intentionally establishing the specific conditions in the special game, the notification game time (number of times) is prioritized over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game. It is assumed that In this case, if a game time of the notification game that is longer than the game time of the notification game in the first lottery state is selected as the game time of the notification game, the player may feel frustrated or stressed. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state is always and surely made shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. it can. Accordingly, a player who selects the second lottery state by giving priority to the notification game time (number of times) over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game can be frustrated or stressed by the longer notification game time. Feel is reduced.

[Appendix J11]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to J10, wherein the specific time is a fixed game time.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J11, the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state is fixed. In this way, by fixing the specific time, which is the game time of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state, the notification game can be repeatedly executed in a short time with a constant rhythm. Thereby, feeling of irritation and stress in the second lottery state is further reduced.

[Appendix J12]
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is Determine the predetermined time,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) does not cause the transition to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to J11, wherein the gaming machine determines a specific time.

  By the way, in a jackpot lottery in a general gaming machine, even if the state is probable, it is far more likely that the player loses the jackpot than the jackpot. Also, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the decoration symbol is long, it is assumed that the player feels frustration or stress.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J12, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special gaming state, a notification game for reporting the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time. In the case where the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, a notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed at a specific time. As described above, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time, and the transition determination in the second lottery state is performed. If the result of is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed in a specific time, thereby ensuring at least the overall notification game time in the second lottery state. In the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state, when the result of the transition determination is not a transition to the special game state, the player is less likely to feel frustrated or stressed.

[Appendix J13]
A restricted state that restricts the passage of the game ball in the specified area (315) that gives an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball, and an allowable state that allows the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area (315). And an electric accessory (315b) for switching between
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), the frequency or probability of switching to the first electric auditors product operating state (normal gaming state) and the allowable state by the electric auditors product (315b) is the first electric auditors product. A second electric auditors product operation state higher than the operation state (time-saving gaming state),
The notification game time determination means (41) sets the notification game time as the game time of the notification game when the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in the second electric auditors operation state (time saving game state). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes J1 to J12, wherein the specific time is determined.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J13, the second electric lottery operating state (the time-saving gaming state) in which the frequency or probability that the second lottery state is switched to the permissible state in which the game ball is allowed to pass in the specified area by the electric auditory goods is high. ), The specific time is determined as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the shift determination. In this manner, when the second lottery state is the second electric auditors product operating state (time-saving gaming state) having a high frequency or probability of being switched to an allowable state in which the passing of game balls in the specified area is allowed by the electric auditors. By determining the specific time as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the transfer determination, the transfer determination is frequently performed in the second lottery state, and more notification games can be executed in a short time. . Thereby, the digestion speed of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state can be increased, and the second lottery state can be ended in a short time. Therefore, for example, when the player selects the transition to the second lottery state that the specific condition is not satisfied in the special game, the second lottery state can be completed in a short time, so that the player's wish can be satisfied. It is possible to reduce the feeling of irritation and stress of the player in the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state while reliably fulfilling the condition.

[Appendix K1]
Based on the determination condition being satisfied, a transition determination unit (transfer determination unit) for performing a transition determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed. 41)
Notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means (41);
A first lottery state (high-probability mode) in which a transition determination probability (big hit probability) at which a result of the transition determination makes a transition to the special game state (big hit game) is a first transition determination probability; and the transfer determination probability A lottery state determining means (41) for determining which of a second lottery state (low probability mode) in which the (big hit probability) is lower than the first shift determination probability;
Notification game time determination means (41) for determining a game time (variable display time) of the notification game when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41);
With
The special game state includes a first special game state (probable change game state) which is shifted to the first lottery state (high probability mode) after the end of the special game, and a second lottery state ( Low special mode), and
The lottery state determination means (41) sets the first lottery state as a lottery state when the special game is over, when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state (big hit game). High probability mode) or the second lottery state (low probability mode).
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41), a predetermined time is determined as a game time of the notification game,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the transition determination is performed by the transition determination unit (41), a specific time shorter than a predetermined time is determined as the game time of the notification game. Gaming machine to do.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K1, as the lottery state in which the transition determination is performed, the transition determination probability is high, and the first lottery state in which the game time of the notification game is performed for a predetermined time is long, and the transition determination probability is low and the notification game is predetermined. A second lottery state executed in a specific time shorter than the time, and if the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state, the first lottery state is set as a lottery state when the special game is completed. And whether to shift to the second lottery state is determined. The first lottery state is advantageous to the player in that the transition determination probability is high, but since the game time of the notification game is long, the number of executions of the notification game per unit time is reduced. On the other hand, the second lottery state is disadvantageous to the player in that the transition determination probability is low, but the number of executions of the notification game per unit time increases because the game time of the notification game is short. Thus, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have different characteristics in the transition determination probability and the game time of the notification game. Therefore, by including the first lottery state and the second lottery state having different characteristics in the transition determination probability and the game time of the notification game as the lottery state for performing the transition determination, the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game state. In the case of the gaming machine, a new gaming property is provided in the gaming machine in which it is determined whether to shift to the first lottery state or the second lottery state as the lottery state when the special game is finished.

[Appendix K2]
The first lottery state (high-probability mode) has an expected amount of bonuses (big-hit expected value, outgoing value) obtained as a result of the execution of the same number of times of the shift determination as compared to the second lottery state (low-probability mode). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K1, wherein the expected value of the ball is large.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K2, the expected amount of bonuses (big hit expectation value, expected payout value) obtained as a result of executing the shift determination the same number of times in the first lottery state as compared to the second lottery state is different. large. Therefore, the first lottery state and the second lottery state not only have different transition determination probabilities, but also have a different expected amount of privilege obtained as a result of performing the same number of transition determinations. Accordingly, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a further difference, so that a gaming machine having further novel gaming properties is provided.

[Appendix K3]
After the end of the special game (big hit game), further provided is a lottery state transition means (41) for transitioning to one of the first lottery state (high probability mode) and the second lottery state (low probability mode),
The lottery state shifting means (41) shifts to the second lottery state after the end of the special game when a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game, and the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the special game. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K1 or K2, wherein when the special game is not performed, the game is shifted to the first lottery state after the end of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K3, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game, the game is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special game, and when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the special game, After the end, the state is shifted to the first lottery state. As described above, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game, the state is shifted to the second lottery state after the end of the special game. By shifting to the lottery state, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the special game while paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game.

[Appendix K4]
The gaming machine according to claim K3, wherein the player can select whether or not to satisfy the specific condition in the special game.

  By the way, there is a case where the surely changing game state continues until the game hall is closed, and the user is forced to leave the game hall in the surely changing game state. In addition, the player may have a limited game time due to the use of the game, and may have a certain-variable game state at his or her scheduled closing time. In other words, in a situation where there is a time constraint between the closing time of the game hall and the scheduled closing time of the game hall, a situation may occur in which it is necessary to leave the shop in the probable change game state. When such a situation is expected to occur, if a sufficient game time can be secured, more balls may be obtained, and thus there is a tendency that it is not desired to end the game in the probable game state. Further, the player desires to execute the notification game as many times as possible in a short time as much as possible within the range of the remaining game time, and eventually to execute the big hit game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K4, the player can select whether or not to satisfy a specific condition in a special game. As described above, the player can select whether or not to satisfy the specific condition in the special game, so that the player can obtain a privilege (payout ball) obtained by executing the special game rather than the notification game time (number of times). When the priority is given, the special condition is established in the special game state, and when the priority (payout) obtained by executing the special game is prioritized, the specific condition is established in the special game state, and the execution of the special game is selected. In the case where the notification game time (number of times) is prioritized over the privilege (payout) obtained by the above, it is possible to select that the specific condition is not satisfied. This makes it possible to select a lottery state according to the situation and intention of the player, including the case where there is a time constraint of the player.

[Appendix K5]
The second transition determination probability (big hit probability in the low probability mode) includes a plurality of different transition determination probabilities,
The supplementary note K1 wherein the first transition determination probability (big hit probability in the high probability mode) is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. To K4.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K5, the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among a plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability. As described above, since the first transition determination probability is higher than the highest transition determination probability among the plurality of transition determination probabilities included in the second transition determination probability, the transition determination probability in the first lottery state is set to the second transition determination probability. The transition determination probability in the lottery state can be reliably increased. This makes it possible to reliably make a difference between the first lottery state and the second lottery state with respect to the transition determination probability, and to make a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. Can be improved, so that the playability is improved.

[Appendix K6]
At least one of the predetermined time and the specific time includes a plurality of game times, and a maximum time (time saving) of the specific time is shorter than a minimum time of the predetermined time. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K6, the maximum time of the specific time, which is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state, is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state. It is shorter than a certain minimum time. As described above, the maximum time of the specific time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is the predetermined time that is the game time of the notification game with respect to the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state. By being shorter than the minimum time, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state can always and reliably be shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. This makes it possible to ensure that the first lottery state and the second lottery state have a difference in the game time of the notification game, and that there is a certain difference in the game mode between the first lottery state and the second lottery state. The playability can be improved.

  By the way, when the player selects the second lottery state without intentionally establishing the specific conditions in the special game, the notification game time (number of times) is prioritized over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game. It is assumed that In this case, if a game time of the notification game that is longer than the game time of the notification game in the first lottery state is selected as the game time of the notification game, the player may feel frustrated or stressed. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K6, the notification game time for the transition determination in the first lottery state is always and reliably made shorter than the notification game time for the transition determination in the second lottery state. it can. Accordingly, a player who selects the second lottery state by giving priority to the notification game time (number of times) over the privilege (payout) obtained by executing the special game can be frustrated or stressed by the longer notification game time. Feel is reduced.

[Appendix K7]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K1 to K6, wherein the specific time is a fixed game time.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K7, the specific time, which is the game time of the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state, is fixed. In this way, by fixing the specific time, which is the game time of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state, the notification game can be repeatedly executed in a short time with a constant rhythm. Thereby, feeling of irritation and stress in the second lottery state is further reduced.

[Appendix K8]
The notification game time determination means (41)
In the first lottery state (high probability mode), when the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) does not shift to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is Determine the predetermined time,
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) does not cause the transition to the special game state (big hit game), the game time of the notification game is The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K1 to K7, wherein the specific time is determined.

  By the way, in a jackpot lottery in a general gaming machine, even if the state is probable, it is far more likely that the player loses the jackpot than the jackpot. Also, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the decoration symbol is long, it is assumed that the player feels frustration or stress.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K8, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special gaming state, a notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time. In the case where the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, a notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed at a specific time. As described above, when the result of the transition determination in the first lottery state is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed for a predetermined time, and the transition determination in the second lottery state is performed. If the result of is not a transition to the special game state, the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination is executed in a specific time, thereby ensuring at least the overall notification game time in the second lottery state. In the notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination in the second lottery state, when the result of the transition determination is not a transition to the special game state, the player is less likely to feel frustrated or stressed.

[Appendix K9]
A restricted state that restricts the passage of the game ball in the specified area (315) that gives an opportunity to satisfy the determination condition by the passage of the game ball, and an allowable state that allows the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area (315). And an electric accessory (315b) for switching between
In the second lottery state (low probability mode), the frequency or probability of switching to the first electric auditors product operating state (normal gaming state) and the allowable state by the electric auditors product (315b) is the first electric auditors product. A second electric auditors product operation state higher than the operation state (time-saving gaming state),
The notification game time determination means (41) sets the notification game time as the game time of the notification game when the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in the second electric auditors operation state (time saving game state). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K1 to K8, wherein the specific time is determined.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K9, the second electric lottery operating state (the time-saving gaming state) in which the frequency or the probability that the second lottery state is switched to the allowable state in which the passing of the game ball in the specified area is allowed by the electric auditory substance is switched. ), The specific time is determined as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the shift determination. In this manner, when the second lottery state is the second electric auditors product operating state (time-saving gaming state) having a high frequency or probability of being switched to an allowable state in which the passing of game balls in the specified area is allowed by the electric auditors. By determining the specific time as the game time in the notification game for notifying the result of the transfer determination, the transfer determination is frequently performed in the second lottery state, and more notification games can be executed in a short time. . Thereby, the digestion speed of the notification game for the transition determination in the second lottery state can be increased, and the second lottery state can be ended in a short time. Therefore, for example, when the player selects the transition to the second lottery state that the specific condition is not satisfied in the special game, the second lottery state can be completed in a short time, so that the player's wish can be satisfied. It is possible to reduce the feeling of irritation and stress of the player in the notification game with respect to the transition determination in the second lottery state while reliably fulfilling the condition.

10: gaming machine 341: symbol display unit 35: variable winning device 352: variable winning door 353: variable winning opening 36: V winning device 362: V winning door 363: variable winning opening 364: V winning opening 365: switching member 371: Ordinary symbol display 372: first special symbol display (first special symbol display)
373: 2nd special symbol display section (2nd special figure display section)
4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
47: ROM
5: Voice lamp controller 51: MPU

Claims (1)

Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a shift determination unit that determines whether to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed,
After the end of the special game, the first game state or the second game in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means is to shift to the special game state is higher than the first game state. State transition means for transitioning to a state,
Notification game execution means for executing a notification game for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means,
With
A gaming machine, wherein an average game time of the notification game is set shorter in the first game state than in the second game state.

Images